WO2025072676A1 - Replying to events on a first device by commands using secondary device gestures - Google Patents
Replying to events on a first device by commands using secondary device gestures Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025072676A1 WO2025072676A1 PCT/US2024/048859 US2024048859W WO2025072676A1 WO 2025072676 A1 WO2025072676 A1 WO 2025072676A1 US 2024048859 W US2024048859 W US 2024048859W WO 2025072676 A1 WO2025072676 A1 WO 2025072676A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- electronic device
- message
- gesture
- user
- motion data
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
- G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
- G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
- G06F1/1633—Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
- G06F1/1684—Constructional details or arrangements related to integrated I/O peripherals not covered by groups G06F1/1635 - G06F1/1675
- G06F1/1694—Constructional details or arrangements related to integrated I/O peripherals not covered by groups G06F1/1635 - G06F1/1675 the I/O peripheral being a single or a set of motion sensors for pointer control or gesture input obtained by sensing movements of the portable computer
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/017—Gesture based interaction, e.g. based on a set of recognized hand gestures
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
- H04M1/60—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers including speech amplifiers
- H04M1/6033—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers including speech amplifiers for providing handsfree use or a loudspeaker mode in telephone sets
- H04M1/6041—Portable telephones adapted for handsfree use
- H04M1/6058—Portable telephones adapted for handsfree use involving the use of a headset accessory device connected to the portable telephone
- H04M1/6066—Portable telephones adapted for handsfree use involving the use of a headset accessory device connected to the portable telephone including a wireless connection
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
- H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
- H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
- H04M1/72403—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality
- H04M1/7243—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality with interactive means for internal management of messages
- H04M1/72436—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality with interactive means for internal management of messages for text messaging, e.g. short messaging services [SMS] or e-mails
Definitions
- This application relates generally to detecting gestures, and in particular, to commands using secondary device gestures.
- Electronic devices are used to perform a wide variety of tasks.
- a user may interchangeably use multiple electronic devices.
- the user may utilize a smartphone connected to wireless headphones in order to listen to music, send and receive messages, make telephone calls, and the like.
- Event alerts may also be received at the smartphone such that corresponding information is delivered to the headphones.
- conventional systems do not provide a robust framework to permit users to perform actions using the wireless headphones.
- traditional systems typically do not allow a user to perform head gestures in order to respond affirmatively or negatively to a respective message.
- such systems are not well equipped to quickly cancel audible prompts as long message read-outs. Accordingly, an improved system for commands using secondary device gestures is desired.
- a method includes a first electronic detecting an event alert and causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert.
- the method includes the first electronic device receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device and determining a gesture based on the motion data.
- the method includes the first electronic device causing a first output to be provided at the second electronic device based on the gesture, and performing a first task associated with the event alert.
- FIG. l is a block diagram illustrating a system and environment for implementing a digital assistant, according to various examples.
- FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant, according to various examples.
- FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling, according to various examples.
- FIG. 3 illustrates a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant, according to various examples.
- FIG. 4A is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, according to various examples.
- FIGS. 4B-4G illustrate the use of Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) to perform operations.
- APIs Application Programming Interfaces
- FIG. 5 A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device, according to various examples.
- FIG. 5B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch- sensitive surface that is separate from the display, according to various examples.
- FIG. 6A illustrates a personal electronic device, according to various examples.
- FIG. 6B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device, according to various examples.
- FIG. 7A is a block diagram illustrating a digital assistant system or a server portion thereof, according to various examples.
- FIG. 7B illustrates the functions of the digital assistant shown in FIG. 7A, according to various examples.
- FIG. 7C illustrates a portion of an ontology, according to various examples.
- FIGS. 8A-8F illustrate a system for commands using secondary device gestures, according to various examples.
- FIGS. 9A-9C illustrate a system for commands using secondary device gestures, according to various examples.
- FIG. 10 illustrates a process for commands using secondary device gestures, according to various examples.
- FIG. 11 illustrates a process for commands using secondary device gestures, according to various examples.
- first means “first,” “second,” etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another.
- a first input could be termed a second input, and, similarly, a second input could be termed a first input, without departing from the scope of the various described examples.
- the first input and the second input are both inputs and, in some cases, are separate and different inputs.
- the term “if’ may be construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context.
- the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” may be construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.
- the system performs one or more of the following: identifying a task flow with steps and parameters designed to accomplish the inferred user intent, inputting specific requirements from the inferred user intent into the task flow; executing the task flow by invoking programs, methods, services, APIs, or the like; and generating output responses to the user in an audible (e.g., speech) and/or visual form.
- audible e.g., speech
- a digital assistant is capable of accepting a user request at least partially in the form of a natural language command, request, statement, narrative, and/or inquiry.
- the user request seeks either an informational answer or performance of a task by the digital assistant.
- a satisfactory response to the user request includes a provision of the requested informational answer, a performance of the requested task, or a combination of the two.
- a user asks the digital assistant a question, such as “Where am I right now?” Based on the user’s current location, the digital assistant answers, “You are in Central Park near the west gate.” The user also requests the performance of a task, for example, “Please invite my friends to my girlfriend’s birthday party next week.” In response, the digital assistant can acknowledge the request by saying “Yes, right away,” and then send a suitable calendar invite on behalf of the user to each of the user’s friends listed in the user’s electronic address book. During performance of a requested task, the digital assistant sometimes interacts with the user in a continuous dialogue involving multiple exchanges of information over an extended period of time. There are numerous other ways of interacting with a digital assistant to request information or performance of various tasks. In addition to providing verbal responses and taking programmed actions, the digital assistant also provides responses in other visual or audio forms, e.g., as text, alerts, music, videos, animations, etc.
- a digital assistant is implemented according to a client-server model.
- the digital assistant includes client-side portion 102 (hereafter “DA client 102”) executed on user device 104 and server-side portion 106 (hereafter “DA server 106”) executed on server system 108.
- DA client 102 communicates with DA server 106 through one or more networks 110.
- DA client 102 provides client-side functionalities such as user-facing input and output processing and communication with DA server 106.
- DA server 106 provides server-side functionalities for any number of DA clients 102 each residing on a respective user device 104.
- DA server 106 includes client-facing I/O interface 112, one or more processing modules 114, data and models 116, and I/O interface to external services 118.
- the client-facing I/O interface 112 facilitates the client-facing input and output processing for DA server 106.
- One or more processing modules 114 utilize data and models 116 to process speech input and determine the user’s intent based on natural language input. Further, one or more processing modules 114 perform task execution based on inferred user intent.
- DA server 106 communicates with external services 120 through network(s) 110 for task completion or information acquisition. I/O interface to external services 118 facilitates such communications.
- user device 104 is a non-portable multifunctional device.
- user device 104 is a desktop computer, a game console, a speaker, a television, or a television set-top box.
- user device 104 includes a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads).
- user device 104 optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick.
- electronic devices such as multifunctional devices, are described below in greater detail.
- Examples of communication network(s) 110 include local area networks (LAN) and wide area networks (WAN), e.g., the Internet.
- Communication network(s) 110 is implemented using any known network protocol, including various wired or wireless protocols, such as, for example, Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol.
- Server system 108 is implemented on one or more standalone data processing apparatus or a distributed network of computers.
- server system 108 also employs various virtual devices and/or services of third-party service providers (e.g., third- party cloud service providers) to provide the underlying computing resources and/or infrastructure resources of server system 108.
- third-party service providers e.g., third- party cloud service providers
- user device 104 communicates with DA server 106 via second user device 122.
- Second user device 122 is similar or identical to user device 104.
- second user device 122 is similar to devices 200, 400, or 600 described below with reference to FIGS. 2A, 4A, and 6A-6B.
- User device 104 is configured to communicatively couple to second user device 122 via a direct communication connection, such as Bluetooth, NFC, BTLE, or the like, or via a wired or wireless network, such as a local Wi-Fi network.
- second user device 122 is configured to act as a proxy between user device 104 and DA server 106.
- DA client 102 of user device 104 is configured to transmit information (e.g., a user request received at user device 104) to DA server 106 via second user device 122.
- DA server 106 processes the information and returns relevant data (e.g., data content responsive to the user request) to user device 104 via second user device 122.
- user device 104 is configured to communicate abbreviated requests for data to second user device 122 to reduce the amount of information transmitted from user device 104.
- Second user device 122 is configured to determine supplemental information to add to the abbreviated request to generate a complete request to transmit to DA server 106.
- This system architecture can advantageously allow user device 104 having limited communication capabilities and/or limited battery power (e.g., a watch or a similar compact electronic device) to access services provided by DA server 106 by using second user device 122, having greater communication capabilities and/or battery power (e.g., a mobile phone, laptop computer, tablet computer, or the like), as a proxy to DA server 106. While only two user devices 104 and 122 are shown in FIG.
- system 100 in some examples, includes any number and type of user devices configured in this proxy configuration to communicate with DA server system 106.
- the digital assistant shown in FIG. 1 includes both a client-side portion (e.g., DA client 102) and a server-side portion (e.g., DA server 106), in some examples, the functions of a digital assistant are implemented as a standalone application installed on a user device.
- the divisions of functionalities between the client and server portions of the digital assistant can vary in different implementations.
- the DA client is a thin-client that provides only user-facing input and output processing functions, and delegates all other functionalities of the digital assistant to a backend server.
- FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 200 with touch-sensitive display system 212 in accordance with some embodiments.
- Touch-sensitive display 212 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a “touch-sensitive display system.”
- Device 200 includes memory 202 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller 222, one or more processing units (CPUs) 220, peripherals interface 218, RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, input/output (I/O) subsystem 206, other input control devices 216, and external port 224.
- memory 202 which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums
- memory controller 222 includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 220, peripherals interface 218, RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, input/output (I/O) subsystem 206, other input control devices 216, and external port 224.
- Device 200 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 264.
- Device 200 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 200 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200).
- Device 200 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs on device 200 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch- sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200 or touchpad 455 of device 400). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 203.
- the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch- sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors.
- one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface.
- force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact.
- a pressuresensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch- sensitive surface.
- the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements).
- the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure).
- the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure.
- the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user’s sense of touch.
- a component e.g., a touch-sensitive surface
- another component e.g., housing
- the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device.
- a touch-sensitive surface e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad
- the user is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button.
- a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user’s movements.
- movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users.
- a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”)
- the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.
- device 200 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 200 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components.
- the various components shown in FIG. 2A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits.
- Memory 202 includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums.
- the computer-readable storage mediums are, for example, tangible and non-transitory.
- Memory 202 includes high-speed random access memory and also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices.
- Memory controller 222 controls access to memory 202 by other components of device 200.
- a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 202 is used to store instructions (e.g., for performing aspects of processes described below) for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processor-containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions.
- the instructions e.g., for performing aspects of the processes described below
- Peripherals interface 218 is used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 220 and memory 202.
- the one or more processors 220 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 202 to perform various functions for device 200 and to process data.
- peripherals interface 218, CPU 220, and memory controller 222 are implemented on a single chip, such as chip 204. In some other embodiments, they are implemented on separate chips.
- RF (radio frequency) circuitry 208 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals.
- RF circuitry 208 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals.
- RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.
- an antenna system an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.
- SIM subscriber identity module
- RF circuitry 208 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication.
- the RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio.
- NFC near field communication
- the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.
- GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
- EDGE Enhanced Data GSM Environment
- HSDPA high-speed downlink packet access
- HUPA high-speed uplink packet access
- Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO) Evolution, Data-Only
- HSPA HSPA+
- DC-HSPDA Dual-Cell HSPA
- I la IEEE 802.1 lb, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.1 In, and/or IEEE 802.1 lac
- VoIP voice over Internet Protocol
- Wi-MAX a protocol for e mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document.
- IMAP Internet message access protocol
- POP post office protocol
- instant messaging e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)
- SMS Short Message Service
- Audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, and microphone 213 provide an audio interface between a user and device 200.
- Audio circuitry 210 receives audio data from peripherals interface 218, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 211.
- Speaker 211 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves.
- Audio circuitry 210 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 213 from sound waves.
- Audio circuitry 210 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 218 for processing. Audio data are retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 202 and/or RF circuitry 208 by peripherals interface 218.
- audio circuitry 210 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 312, FIG. 3).
- the headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 210 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).
- removable audio input/output peripherals such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).
- I/O subsystem 206 couples input/output peripherals on device 200, such as touch screen 212 and other input control devices 216, to peripherals interface 218.
- I/O subsystem 206 optionally includes display controller 256, optical sensor controller 258, intensity sensor controller 259, haptic feedback controller 261, and one or more input controllers 260 for other input or control devices.
- the one or more input controllers 260 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 216.
- the other input control devices 216 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth.
- input controlled s) 260 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse.
- the one or more buttons e.g., 308, FIG. 3 optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 211 and/or microphone 213.
- the one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 306, FIG. 3).
- a quick press of the push button disengages a lock of touch screen 212 or begin a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. Patent Application 11/322,549, “Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image,” filed December 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- a longer press of the push button (e.g., 306) turns power to device 200 on or off. The user is able to customize a functionality of one or more of the buttons.
- Touch screen 212 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.
- Touch-sensitive display 212 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user.
- Display controller 256 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 212.
- Touch screen 212 displays visual output to the user.
- the visual output includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output correspond to userinterface objects.
- Touch screen 212 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact.
- Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 202) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 212 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 212.
- user-interface objects e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images
- a point of contact between touch screen 212 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user.
- Touch screen 212 uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies may be used in other embodiments.
- Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 212.
- touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 212.
- projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.
- a touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 is analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Patents: 6,323,846 (Westerman et al.), 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- touch screen 212 displays visual output from device 200, whereas touch- sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.
- a touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 is as described in the following applications: (1) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/381,313, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/903,964, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed July 30, 2004; (4) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/048,264, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed January 31, 2005; (5) U.S. Patent Application No.
- Touch screen 212 has, for example, a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi.
- the user makes contact with touch screen 212 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth.
- the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen.
- the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.
- device 200 in addition to the touch screen, device 200 includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions.
- the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output.
- the touchpad is a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch screen 212 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.
- Device 200 also includes power system 262 for powering the various components.
- Power system 262 includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.
- power sources e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)
- AC alternating current
- a recharging system e.g., a recharging system
- a power failure detection circuit e.g., a power failure detection circuit
- a power converter or inverter e.g., a power converter or inverter
- a power status indicator e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)
- Device 200 also includes one or more optical sensors 264.
- FIG. 2A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 258 in EO subsystem 206.
- Optical sensor 264 includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal -oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors.
- CCD charge-coupled device
- CMOS complementary metal -oxide semiconductor
- Optical sensor 264 receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image.
- imaging module 243 also called a camera module
- optical sensor 264 captures still images or video.
- an optical sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is used as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition.
- an optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user’s image is obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display.
- the position of optical sensor 264 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 264 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.
- Device 200 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265.
- FIG. 2A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 259 in EO subsystem 206.
- Contact intensity sensor 265 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface).
- Contact intensity sensor 265 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment.
- At least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200.
- a touch-sensitive surface e.g., touch-sensitive display system 2112.
- at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200.
- Device 200 also includes one or more proximity sensors 266.
- FIG. 2A shows proximity sensor 266 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, proximity sensor 266 is coupled to input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206. Proximity sensor 266 is performed as described in U.S. Patent Application Nos.
- the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 212 when the multifunction device is placed near the user’s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).
- Device 200 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 267.
- FIG. 2A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 261 in I/O subsystem 206.
- Tactile output generator 267 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device).
- Contact intensity sensor 265 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 233 and generates tactile outputs on device 200 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 200.
- At least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 200) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 200).
- at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200.
- Device 200 also includes one or more accelerometers 268.
- FIG. 2A shows accelerometer 268 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, accelerometer 268 is coupled to an input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206. Accelerometer 268 performs, for example, as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, “Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices,” and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, “Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,” both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
- information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers.
- Device 200 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 268, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 200.
- the software components stored in memory 202 include operating system 226, communication module (or set of instructions) 228, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 230, graphics module (or set of instructions) 232, text input module (or set of instructions) 234, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 235, Digital Assistant Client Module 229, and applications (or sets of instructions) 236.
- memory 202 stores data and models, such as user data and models 231.
- memory 202 (FIG. 2A) or 470 (FIG. 4A) stores device/global internal state 257, as shown in FIGS. 2A and 4A.
- Device/global internal state 257 includes one or more of active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 212; sensor state, including information obtained from the device’s various sensors and input control devices 216; and location information concerning the device’s location and/or attitude.
- Operating system 226 e.g, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks
- Operating system 226 includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g, memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.
- Communication module 228 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 224 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 208 and/or external port 224.
- External port 224 e.g. Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.
- USB Universal Serial Bus
- FIREWIRE FireWire
- the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.
- Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects contact with touch screen 212 (in conjunction with display controller 256) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel).
- Contact/motion module 230 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact).
- Contact/motion module 230 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 230 and display controller 256 detect contact on a touchpad.
- contact/motion module 230 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon).
- at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 200). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware.
- detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon).
- detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.
- Graphics module 232 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 212 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed.
- graphics includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including , without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.
- graphics module 232 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 232 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 256.
- Haptic feedback module 233 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 267 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 200 in response to user interactions with device 200.
- Text input module 23 which is, in some examples, a component of graphics module 232, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 237, email 240, IM 241, browser 247, and any other application that needs text input).
- applications e.g., contacts 237, email 240, IM 241, browser 247, and any other application that needs text input.
- GPS module 235 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 238 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 243 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location- based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
- applications e.g., to telephone 238 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 243 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location- based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
- Digital assistant client module 229 includes various client-side digital assistant instructions to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant.
- digital assistant client module 229 is capable of accepting voice input (e.g., speech input), text input, touch input, and/or gestural input through various user interfaces (e.g., microphone 213, accelerometer(s) 268, touch-sensitive display system 212, optical sensor(s) 264, other input control devices 216, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200.
- Digital assistant client module 229 is also capable of providing output in audio (e.g., speech output), visual, and/or tactile forms through various output interfaces (e.g., speaker 211, touch-sensitive display system 212, tactile output generator(s) 267, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200.
- output is provided as voice, sound, alerts, text messages, menus, graphics, videos, animations, vibrations, and/or combinations of two or more of the above.
- digital assistant client module 229 communicates with DA server 106 using RF circuitry 208.
- User data and models 231 include various data associated with the user (e.g., userspecific vocabulary data, user preference data, user-specified name pronunciations, data from the user’s electronic address book, to-do lists, shopping lists, etc.) to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant. Further, user data and models 231 include various models (e.g., speech recognition models, statistical language models, natural language processing models, ontology, task flow models, service models, etc.) for processing user input and determining user intent.
- models e.g., speech recognition models, statistical language models, natural language processing models, ontology, task flow models, service models, etc.
- digital assistant client module 229 utilizes the various sensors, subsystems, and peripheral devices of portable multifunction device 200 to gather additional information from the surrounding environment of the portable multifunction device 200 to establish a context associated with a user, the current user interaction, and/or the current user input.
- digital assistant client module 229 provides the contextual information or a subset thereof with the user input to DA server 106 to help infer the user’s intent.
- the digital assistant also uses the contextual information to determine how to prepare and deliver outputs to the user. Contextual information is referred to as context data.
- the contextual information that accompanies the user input includes sensor information, e.g., lighting, ambient noise, ambient temperature, images or videos of the surrounding environment, etc.
- the contextual information can also include the physical state of the device, e.g., device orientation, device location, device temperature, power level, speed, acceleration, motion patterns, cellular signals strength, etc.
- information related to the software state of DA server 106 e.g., running processes, installed programs, past and present network activities, background services, error logs, resources usage, etc., and of portable multifunction device 200 is provided to DA server 106 as contextual information associated with a user input.
- the digital assistant client module 229 selectively provides information (e.g., user data 231) stored on the portable multifunction device 200 in response to requests from DA server 106. In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 also elicits additional input from the user via a natural language dialogue or other user interfaces upon request by DA server 106. Digital assistant client module 229 passes the additional input to DA server 106 to help DA server 106 in intent deduction and/or fulfillment of the user’s intent expressed in the user request.
- information e.g., user data 231
- digital assistant client module 229 also elicits additional input from the user via a natural language dialogue or other user interfaces upon request by DA server 106.
- Digital assistant client module 229 passes the additional input to DA server 106 to help DA server 106 in intent deduction and/or fulfillment of the user’s intent expressed in the user request.
- digital assistant client module 229 can include any number of the sub-modules of digital assistant module 726 described below.
- Applications 236 include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:
- Contacts module 237 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);
- Video conference module 239 • Video conference module 239;
- Workout support module 242 ; Camera module 243 for still and/or video images;
- Calendar module 248 • Calendar module 248;
- Widget modules 249 which includes, in some examples, one or more of: weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249- 4, dictionary widget 249-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user- created widgets 249-6;
- Widget creator module 250 for making user-created widgets 249-6;
- Video and music player module 252 which merges video player module and music player module
- Map module 254 • Map module 254; and/or
- Examples of other applications 236 that are stored in memory 202 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.
- contacts module 237 are used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 292 of contacts module 237 in memory 202 or memory 470), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e- mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 238, video conference module 239, e-mail 240, or IM 241; and so forth.
- an address book or contact list e.g., stored in application internal state 292 of contacts module 237 in memory 202 or memory 470
- telephone module 238 In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, telephone module 238 are used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 237, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed.
- the wireless communication uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.
- video conference module 239 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.
- e-mail client module 240 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions.
- image management module 244 e-mail client module 240 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 243.
- the instant messaging module 241 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony -based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages.
- SMS Short Message Service
- MMS Multimedia Message Service
- XMPP extensible Markup Language
- SIMPLE Session Initation Protocol
- IMPS Internet Messaging Protocol
- transmitted and/or received instant messages include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS).
- EMS Enhanced Messaging Service
- instant messaging refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).
- workout support module 242 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data.
- create workouts e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals
- communicate with workout sensors sports devices
- receive workout sensor data calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout
- select and play music for a workout and display, store, and transmit workout data.
- camera module 243 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 202, modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 202.
- image management module 244 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.
- modify e.g., edit
- present e.g., in a digital slide show or album
- browser module 247 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.
- calendar module 248 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.
- widget modules 249 are mini-applications that can be downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249-4, and dictionary widget 249-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 249-6).
- a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file.
- a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).
- the widget creator module 250 are used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).
- search module 251 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 202 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.
- search criteria e.g., one or more user-specified search terms
- video and music player module 252 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen 212 or on an external, connected display via external port 224).
- device 200 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).
- notes module 253 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.
- map module 254 are used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.
- maps e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data
- online video module 255 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 224), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264.
- instant messaging module 241 rather than e-mail client module 240, is used to send a link to a particular online video.
- Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein).
- These modules e.g., sets of instructions
- video player module can be combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 252, FIG. 2A).
- memory 202 stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 202 stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
- device 200 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad.
- a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 200, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 200 is reduced.
- the predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces.
- the touchpad when touched by the user, navigates device 200 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 200.
- a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad.
- the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.
- FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.
- memory 202 (FIG. 2A) or 470 (FIG. 4A) includes event sorter 270 (e.g., in operating system 226) and a respective application 236-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 237-251, 255, 480-490).
- event sorter 270 e.g., in operating system 226
- application 236-1 e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 237-251, 255, 480-490.
- Event sorter 270 receives event information and determines the application 236-1 and application view 291 of application 236-1 to which to deliver the event information.
- Event sorter 270 includes event monitor 271 and event dispatcher module 274.
- application 236-1 includes application internal state 292, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 212 when the application is active or executing.
- device/global internal state 257 is used by event sorter 270 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 292 is used by event sorter 270 to determine application views 291 to which to deliver event information.
- application internal state 292 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 236-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 236-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 236-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.
- Event monitor 271 receives event information from peripherals interface 218.
- Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch- sensitive display 212, as part of a multi-touch gesture).
- Peripherals interface 218 transmits information it receives from VO subsystem 206 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 266, accelerometer(s) 268, and/or microphone 213 (through audio circuitry 210).
- Information that peripherals interface 218 receives from I/O subsystem 206 includes information from touch- sensitive display 212 or a touch-sensitive surface.
- event monitor 271 sends requests to the peripherals interface 218 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).
- event sorter 270 also includes a hit view determination module 272 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 273.
- Hit view determination module 272 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 212 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.
- FIG. 1 Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur.
- the application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs is determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.
- Hit view determination module 272 receives information related to sub events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 272 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of subevents that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module 272, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.
- Active event recognizer determination module 273 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.
- Event dispatcher module 274 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 280). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 273, event dispatcher module 274 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 273. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 274 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 282.
- an event recognizer e.g., event recognizer 280.
- event dispatcher module 274 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 273.
- event dispatcher module 274 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 282.
- operating system 226 includes event sorter 270.
- application 236-1 includes event sorter 270.
- event sorter 270 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 202, such as contact/motion module 230.
- application 236-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 290 and one or more application views 291, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application’s user interface.
- Each application view 291 of the application 236-1 includes one or more event recognizers 280.
- a respective application view 291 includes a plurality of event recognizers 280.
- one or more of event recognizers 280 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 236-1 inherits methods and other properties.
- a respective event handler 290 includes one or more of: data updater 276, object updater 277, GUI updater 278, and/or event data 279 received from event sorter 270.
- Event handler 290 utilizes or calls data updater 276, object updater 277, or GUI updater 278 to update the application internal state 292.
- one or more of the application views 291 include one or more respective event handlers 290.
- one or more of data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a respective application view 291.
- a respective event recognizer 280 receives event information (e.g., event data 279) from event sorter 270 and identifies an event from the event information.
- Event recognizer 280 includes event receiver 282 and event comparator 284.
- event recognizer 280 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 283, and event delivery instructions 288 (which include sub-event delivery instructions).
- Event receiver 282 receives event information from event sorter 270.
- the event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement.
- the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event.
- the event information also includes speed and direction of the sub-event.
- events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.
- Event comparator 284 compares the event information to predefined event or subevent definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event.
- event comparator 284 includes event definitions 286.
- Event definitions 286 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (287-1), event 2 (287- 2), and others.
- sub-events in an event (287) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching.
- the definition for event 1 (287-1) is a double tap on a displayed object.
- the double tap for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase.
- the definition for event 2 (287-2) is a dragging on a displayed object.
- the dragging for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch- sensitive display 212, and liftoff of the touch (touch end).
- the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 290.
- event definition 287 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object.
- event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 212, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 212, event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 290, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 290 should be activated. For example, event comparator 284 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.
- the definition for a respective event (287) also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer’s event type.
- a respective event recognizer 280 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 286, the respective event recognizer 280 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.
- a respective event recognizer 280 includes metadata 283 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers.
- metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another.
- metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.
- a respective event recognizer 280 activates event handler 290 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized.
- a respective event recognizer 280 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 290. Activating an event handler 290 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view.
- event recognizer 280 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 290 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.
- event delivery instructions 288 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.
- data updater 276 creates and updates data used in application 236-1. For example, data updater 276 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 237, or stores a video file used in video player module.
- object updater 277 creates and updates objects used in application 236-1. For example, object updater 277 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object.
- GUI updater 278 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 278 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 232 for display on a touch- sensitive display.
- event handler(s) 290 includes or has access to data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278.
- data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a single module of a respective application 236-1 or application view 291. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
- FIG. 3 illustrates a portable multifunction device 200 having a touch screen 212 in accordance with some embodiments.
- the touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 300.
- UI user interface
- a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 302 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 303 (not drawn to scale in the figure).
- selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics.
- the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 200.
- inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.
- Device 200 also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 304.
- menu button 304 is used to navigate to any application 236 in a set of applications that is executed on device 200.
- the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 212.
- device 200 includes touch screen 212, menu button 304, push button 306 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 308, subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 310, headset jack 312, and docking/charging external port 224.
- Push button 306 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process.
- device 200 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 213.
- Device 200 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 212 and/or one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 200.
- FIG. 4A is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
- Device 400 need not be portable.
- device 400 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child’s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller).
- Device 400 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 410, one or more network or other communications interfaces 460, memory 470, and one or more communication buses 420 for interconnecting these components.
- CPUs processing units
- Memory 470 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes nonvolatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 470 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 410. In some embodiments, memory 470 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 470 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200.
- memory 470 of device 400 optionally stores drawing module 480, presentation module 482, word processing module 484, website creation module 486, disk authoring module 488, and/or spreadsheet module 490, while memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A) optionally does not store these modules.
- Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 4A is, in some examples, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices.
- Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above.
- the above-identified modules or programs (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments.
- memory 470 stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 470 stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
- Implementations within the scope of the present disclosure can be partially or entirely realized using a tangible computer-readable storage medium (or multiple tangible computer-readable storage media of one or more types) encoding one or more computer- readable instructions. It should be recognized that computer-readable instructions can be organized in any format, including applications, widgets, processes, software, and/or components.
- application 3160 can be any suitable type of application, including, for example, one or more of: a browser application, an application that functions as an execution environment for plug-ins, widgets or other applications, a fitness application, a health application, a digital payments application, a media application, a social network application, a messaging application, and/or a maps application.
- application 3160 is an application that is pre-installed on device 3150 at purchase (e.g., a first-party application).
- application 3160 is an application that is provided to device 3150 via an operating system update file (e.g., a first-party application or a second-party application).
- application 3160 is an application that is provided via an application store.
- the application store can be an application store that is pre-installed on device 3150 at purchase (e.g., a first-party application store).
- the application store is a third-party application store (e.g., an application store that is provided by another application store, downloaded via a network, and/or read from a storage device).
- application 3160 obtains information (e.g., 3010).
- information is obtained from at least one hardware component of device 3150.
- information is obtained from at least one software module of device 3150.
- information is obtained from at least one hardware component external to device 3150 (e.g., a peripheral device, an accessory device, and/or a server).
- the information obtained at 3010 includes positional information, time information, notification information, user information, environment information, electronic device state information, weather information, media information, historical information, event information, hardware information, and/or motion information.
- application 3160 in response to and/or after obtaining the information at 3010, application 3160 provides the information to a system (e.g., 3020).
- the system (e.g., 3110 shown in FIG. 4E) is an operating system hosted on device 3150.
- the system e.g., 3110 shown in FIG. 4E
- an external device e.g., a server, a peripheral device, an accessory, and/or a personal computing device that includes an operating system.
- application 3160 obtains information (e.g., 3030).
- the information obtained at 3030 includes positional information, time information, notification information, user information, environment information electronic device state information, weather information, media information, historical information, event information, hardware information, and/or motion information.
- application 3160 performs an operation with the information (e.g., 3040).
- the operation performed at 3040 includes: providing a notification based on the information, sending a message based on the information, displaying the information, controlling a user interface of a fitness application based on the information, controlling a user interface of a health application based on the information, controlling a focus mode based on the information, setting a reminder based on the information, adding a calendar entry based on the information, and/or calling an API of system 3110 based on the information.
- one or more steps of the method of FIG. 4B and/or the method of FIG. 4C is performed in response to a trigger.
- the trigger includes detection of an event, a notification received from system 3110, a user input, and/or a response to a call to an API provided by system 3110.
- the instructions of application 3160 when executed, control device 3150 to perform the method of FIG. 4B and/or the method of FIG. 4C by calling an application programming interface (API) (e.g., API 3190) provided by system 3110.
- API application programming interface
- application 3160 performs at least a portion of the method of FIG. 4B and/or the method of FIG. 4C without calling API 3190.
- one or more steps of the method of FIG. 4B and/or the method of FIG. 4C includes calling an API (e.g., API 3190) using one or more parameters defined by the API.
- the one or more parameters include a constant, a key, a data structure, an object, an object class, a variable, a data type, a pointer, an array, a list or a pointer to a function or method, and/or another way to reference a data or other item to be passed via the API.
- device 3150 is illustrated.
- device 3150 is a personal computing device, a smart phone, a smart watch, a fitness tracker, a head mounted display (HMD) device, a media device, a communal device, a speaker, a television, and/or a tablet.
- device 3150 includes application 3160 and an operating system (e.g., system 3110 shown in FIG. 4E).
- Application 3160 includes application implementation module 3170 and API-calling module 3180.
- System 3110 includes API 3190 and implementation module 3100. It should be recognized that device 3150, application 3160, and/or system 3110 can include more, fewer, and/or different components than illustrated in FIGS. 4D and 4E.
- application implementation module 3170 includes a set of one or more instructions corresponding to one or more operations performed by application 3160.
- application implementation module 3170 can include operations to receive and send messages.
- application implementation module 3170 communicates with API-calling module 3180 to communicate with system 3110 via API 3190 (shown in FIG. 4E).
- API 3190 is a software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that provides an interface that allows a different module (e.g., API-calling module 3180) to access and/or use one or more functions, methods, procedures, data structures, classes, and/or other services provided by implementation module 3100 of system 3110.
- a software module e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions
- API-calling module 3180 e.g., API-calling module 3180
- API-calling module 3180 can access a feature of implementation module 3100 through one or more API calls or invocations (e.g., embodied by a function or a method call) exposed by API 3190 (e.g., a software and/or hardware module that can receive API calls, respond to API calls, and/or send API calls) and can pass data and/or control information using one or more parameters via the API calls or invocations.
- API 3190 allows application 3160 to use a service provided by a Software Development Kit (SDK) library.
- SDK Software Development Kit
- application 3160 incorporates a call to a function or method provided by the SDK library and provided by API 3190 or uses data types or objects defined in the SDK library and provided by API 3190.
- API-calling module 3180 makes an API call via API 3190 to access and use a feature of implementation module 3100 that is specified by API 3190.
- implementation module 3100 can return a value via API 3190 to API- calling module 3180 in response to the API call.
- the value can report to application 3160 the capabilities or state of a hardware component of device 3150, including those related to aspects such as input capabilities and state, output capabilities and state, processing capability, power state, storage capacity and state, and/or communications capability.
- API 3190 is implemented in part by firmware, microcode, or other low level logic that executes in part on the hardware component.
- API 3190 allows a developer of API-calling module 3180 (which can be a third-party developer) to leverage a feature provided by implementation module 3100.
- API 3190 allows multiple API-calling modules written in different programming languages to communicate with implementation module 3100 (e.g., API 3190 can include features for translating calls and returns between implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180) while API 3190 is implemented in terms of a specific programming language.
- API-calling module 3180 calls APIs from different providers such as a set of APIs from an OS provider, another set of APIs from a plug-in provider, and/or another set of APIs from another provider (e.g., the provider of a software library) or creator of the another set of APIs.
- providers such as a set of APIs from an OS provider, another set of APIs from a plug-in provider, and/or another set of APIs from another provider (e.g., the provider of a software library) or creator of the another set of APIs.
- Examples of API 3190 can include one or more of: a pairing API (e.g., for establishing secure connection, e.g., with an accessory), a device detection API (e.g., for locating nearby devices, e.g., media devices and/or smartphone), a payment API, a UIKit API (e.g., for generating user interfaces), a location detection API, a locator API, a maps API, a health sensor API, a sensor API, a messaging API, a push notification API, a streaming API, a collaboration API, a video conferencing API, an application store API, an advertising services API, a web browser API (e.g., WebKit API), a vehicle API, a networking API, a WiFi API, a Bluetooth API, an NFC API, a UWB API, a fitness API, a smart home API, contact transfer API, photos API, camera API, and/or image processing API.
- a pairing API e.g., for establishing secure connection,
- the sensor API is an API for accessing data associated with a sensor of device 3150.
- the sensor API can provide access to raw sensor data.
- the sensor API can provide data derived (and/or generated) from the raw sensor data.
- the sensor data includes temperature data, image data, video data, audio data, heart rate data, IMU (inertial measurement unit) data, lidar data, location data, GPS data, and/or camera data.
- the sensor includes one or more of an accelerometer, temperature sensor, infrared sensor, optical sensor, heartrate sensor, barometer, gyroscope, proximity sensor, temperature sensor, and/or biometric sensor.
- implementation module 3100 is a system (e.g., operating system and/or server system) software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that is constructed to perform an operation in response to receiving an API call via API 3190.
- implementation module 3100 is constructed to provide an API response (via API 3190) as a result of processing an API call.
- implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180 can each be any one of an operating system, a library, a device driver, an API, an application program, or other module. It should be understood that implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180 can be the same or different type of module from each other.
- implementation module 3100 is embodied at least in part in firmware, microcode, or hardware logic.
- implementation module 3100 returns a value through API 3190 in response to an API call from API-calling module 3180. While API 3190 defines the syntax and result of an API call (e.g., how to invoke the API call and what the API call does), API 3190 might not reveal how implementation module 3100 accomplishes the function specified by the API call.
- Various API calls are transferred via the one or more application programming interfaces between API-calling module 3180 and implementation module 3100. Transferring the API calls can include issuing, initiating, invoking, calling, receiving, returning, and/or responding to the function calls or messages. In other words, transferring can describe actions by either of API-calling module 3180 or implementation module 3100.
- a function call or other invocation of API 3190 sends and/or receives one or more parameters through a parameter list or other structure.
- implementation module 3100 provides more than one API, each providing a different view of or with different aspects of functionality implemented by implementation module 3100.
- one API of implementation module 3100 can provide a first set of functions and can be exposed to third-party developers, and another API of implementation module 3100 can be hidden (e.g., not exposed) and provide a subset of the first set of functions and also provide another set of functions, such as testing or debugging functions which are not in the first set of functions.
- implementation module 3100 calls one or more other components via an underlying API and thus is both an API-calling module and an implementation module.
- implementation module 3100 can include additional functions, methods, classes, data structures, and/or other features that are not specified through API 3190 and are not available to API-calling module 3180. It should also be recognized that API-calling module 3180 can be on the same system as implementation module 3100 or can be located remotely and access implementation module 3100 using API 3190 over a network.
- implementation module 3100, API 3190, and/or API-calling module 3180 is stored in a machine-readable medium, which includes any mechanism for storing information in a form readable by a machine (e.g., a computer or other data processing system).
- a machine-readable medium can include magnetic disks, optical disks, random access memory; read only memory, and/or flash memory devices.
- An application programming interface is an interface between a first software process and a second software process that specifies a format for communication between the first software process and the second software process.
- Limited APIs e.g., private APIs or partner APIs
- Public APIs that are accessible to a wider set of software processes.
- Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about or set a state of one or more input devices (e.g., one or more touch sensors, proximity sensors, visual sensors, motion/orientation sensors, pressure sensors, intensity sensors, sound sensors, wireless proximity sensors, biometric sensors, buttons, switches, rotatable elements, and/or external controllers). Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about and/or set a state of one or more output generation components (e.g., one or more audio output generation components, one or more display generation components, and/or one or more tactile output generation components).
- input devices e.g., one or more touch sensors, proximity sensors, visual sensors, motion/orientation sensors, pressure sensors, intensity sensors, sound sensors, wireless proximity sensors, biometric sensors, buttons, switches, rotatable elements, and/or external controllers.
- Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about and/or set a state of one or more output generation components (e.g., one or more audio output generation components, one or more display generation components, and/or one or more tactile output generation components).
- Some APIs enable particular capabilities (e.g., scrolling, handwriting, text entry, image editing, and/or image creation) to be accessed, performed, and/or used by a software process (e.g., generating outputs for use by a software process based on input from the software process).
- Some APIs enable content from a software process to be inserted into a template and displayed in a user interface that has a layout and/or behaviors that are specified by the template.
- Many software platforms include a set of frameworks that provides the core objects and core behaviors that a software developer needs to build software applications that can be used on the software platform.
- Software developers use these objects to display content onscreen, to interact with that content, and to manage interactions with the software platform.
- Software applications rely on the set of frameworks for their basic behavior, and the set of frameworks provides many ways for the software developer to customize the behavior of the application to match the specific needs of the software application.
- Many of these core objects and core behaviors are accessed via an API.
- An API will typically specify a format for communication between software processes, including specifying and grouping available variables, functions, and protocols.
- An API call (sometimes referred to as an API request) will typically be sent from a sending software process to a receiving software process as a way to accomplish one or more of the following: the sending software process requesting information from the receiving software process (e.g., for the sending software process to take action on), the sending software process providing information to the receiving software process (e.g., for the receiving software process to take action on), the sending software process requesting action by the receiving software process, or the sending software process providing information to the receiving software process about action taken by the sending software process.
- Interaction with a device will in some circumstances include the transfer and/or receipt of one or more API calls (e.g., multiple API calls) between multiple different software processes (e.g., different portions of an operating system, an application and an operating system, or different applications) via one or more APIs (e.g., via multiple different APIs).
- API calls e.g., multiple API calls
- the direct sensor data is frequently processed into one or more input events that are provided (e.g., via an API) to a receiving software process that makes some determination based on the input events, and then sends (e.g., via an API) information to a software process to perform an operation (e.g., change a device state and/or user interface) based on the determination.
- While a determination and an operation performed in response could be made by the same software process, alternatively the determination could be made in a first software process and relayed (e.g., via an API) to a second software process, that is different from the first software process, that causes the operation to be performed by the second software process.
- the second software process could relay instructions (e.g., via an API) to a third software process that is different from the first software process and/or the second software process to perform the operation.
- some or all user interactions with a computer system could involve one or more API calls within a step of interacting with the computer system (e.g., between different software components of the computer system or between a software component of the computer system and a software component of one or more remote computer systems).
- the application can be any suitable type of application, including, for example, one or more of: a browser application, an application that functions as an execution environment for plug-ins, widgets or other applications, a fitness application, a health application, a digital payments application, a media application, a social network application, a messaging application, and/or a maps application.
- the application is an application that is pre-installed on the first computer system at purchase (e.g., a first-party application).
- the application is an application that is provided to the first computer system via an operating system update file (e.g., a first-party application).
- the application is an application that is provided via an application store.
- the application store is pre-installed on the first computer system at purchase (e.g., a first-party application store) and allows download of one or more applications.
- the application store is a third-party application store (e.g., an application store that is provided by another device, downloaded via a network, and/or read from a storage device).
- exemplary APIs provided by the system process include one or more of: a pairing API (e.g., for establishing secure connection, e.g., with an accessory), a device detection API (e.g., for locating nearby devices, e.g., media devices and/or smartphone), a payment API, a UIKit API (e.g., for generating user interfaces), a location detection API, a locator API, a maps API, a health sensor API, a sensor API, a messaging API, a push notification API, a streaming API, a collaboration API, a video conferencing API, an application store API, an advertising services API, a web browser API (e.g., WebKit API), a vehicle API, a networking API, a WiFi API, a Bluetooth API, an NFC API, a UWB API, a fitness API, a smart home API, contact transfer API, a photos API, a camera API, and/or an image processing API.
- a pairing API e.g.
- At least one API is a software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that provides an interface that allows a different module (e.g., API-calling module) to access and use one or more functions, methods, procedures, data structures, classes, and/or other services provided by an implementation module of the system process.
- the API can define one or more parameters that are passed between the API-calling module and the implementation module.
- API 3190 defines a first API call that can be provided by API-calling module 3180.
- the implementation module is a system software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that is constructed to perform an operation in response to receiving an API call via the API.
- the implementation module is constructed to provide an API response (via the API) as a result of processing an API call.
- the implementation module is included in the device (e.g., 3150) that runs the application.
- the implementation module is included in an electronic device that is separate from the device that runs the application.
- FIG. 5 A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 200 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are implemented on device 400.
- user interface 500 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
- Bluetooth indicator 505 Battery status indicator 506;
- Tray 508 with icons for frequently used applications such as: o Icon 516 for telephone module 238, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 514 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; o Icon 518 for e-mail client module 240, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 510 of the number of unread e-mails; o Icon 520 for browser module 247, labeled “Browser;” and o Icon 522 for video and music player module 252, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 252, labeled “iPod;” and
- Icons for other applications such as: o Icon 524 for IM module 241, labeled “Messages;” o Icon 526 for calendar module 248, labeled “Calendar;” o Icon 528 for image management module 244, labeled “Photos;” o Icon 530 for camera module 243, labeled “Camera;” o Icon 532 for online video module 255, labeled “Online Video;” o Icon 534 for stocks widget 249-2, labeled “Stocks;” o Icon 536 for map module 254, labeled “Maps;” o Icon 538 for weather widget 249-1, labeled “Weather;” o Icon 540 for alarm clock widget 249-4, labeled “Clock;” o Icon 542 for workout support module 242, labeled “Workout Support;” o Icon 544 for notes module 253, labeled “Notes;” and o Icon 546 for a settings application or module,
- FIG. 5B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 400, FIG. 4A) with a touch-sensitive surface 551 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 455, FIG. 4A) that is separate from the display 550 (e.g., touch screen display 212).
- Device 400 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 459) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 551 and/or one or more tactile output generators 457 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 400.
- one or more contact intensity sensors e.g., one or more of sensors 459
- tactile output generators 457 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 400.
- the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 5B.
- the touch-sensitive surface e.g., 551 in FIG. 5B
- the touch-sensitive surface has a primary axis (e.g., 552 in FIG. 5B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 553 in FIG. 5B) on the display (e.g., 550).
- the device detects contacts (e.g., 560 and 562 in FIG.
- finger inputs e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures
- one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input).
- a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact).
- a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact).
- a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact).
- multiple user inputs it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.
- FIG. 6A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 600.
- Device 600 includes body 602.
- device 600 includes some or all of the features described with respect to devices 200 and 400 (e.g., FIGS. 2A-4A).
- device 600 has touch-sensitive display screen 604, hereafter touch screen 604.
- touch screen 604 has one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied.
- the one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) provide output data that represents the intensity of touches.
- the user interface of device 600 responds to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 600.
- device 600 has one or more input mechanisms 606 and 608.
- Input mechanisms 606 and 608, if included, are physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms.
- device 600 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 600 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device 600 to be worn by a user.
- FIG. 6B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 600.
- device 600 includes some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 2 A, 2B, and 4 A.
- Device 600 has bus 612 that operatively couples VO section 614 with one or more computer processors 616 and memory 618.
- I/O section 614 is connected to display 604, which can have touch-sensitive component 622 and, optionally, touch-intensity sensitive component 624.
- I/O section 614 is connected with communication unit 630 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques.
- Device 600 includes input mechanisms 606 and/or 608.
- Input mechanism 606 is a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example.
- Input mechanism 608 is a button, in some examples.
- Input mechanism 608 is a microphone, in some examples.
- Personal electronic device 600 includes, for example, various sensors, such as GPS sensor 632, accelerometer 634, directional sensor 640 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 636, motion sensor 638, and/or a combination thereof, all of which are operatively connected to VO section 614.
- sensors such as GPS sensor 632, accelerometer 634, directional sensor 640 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 636, motion sensor 638, and/or a combination thereof, all of which are operatively connected to VO section 614.
- Memory 618 of personal electronic device 600 is a non-transitory computer- readable storage medium, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 616, for example, cause the computer processors to perform the techniques and processes described below.
- the computerexecutable instructions for example, are also stored and/or transported within any non- transitory computer-readable storage medium for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processorcontaining system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions.
- Personal electronic device 600 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 6B, but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations.
- the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, for example, displayed on the display screen of devices 200, 400, and/or 600 (FIGS. 2A, 4A, and 6A-6B).
- an image e.g., icon
- a button e.g., button
- text e.g., hyperlink
- the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting.
- the cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 455 in FIG. 4A or touch-sensitive surface 551 in FIG. 5B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input.
- a touch-sensitive surface e.g., touchpad 455 in FIG. 4A or touch-sensitive surface 551 in FIG. 5B
- a particular user interface element e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element
- a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input.
- an input e.g., a press input by the contact
- a particular user interface element e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element
- focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface.
- the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user’s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact).
- a focus selector e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box
- a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).
- the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact).
- a predefined time period e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds
- a characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like.
- the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time).
- the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user.
- the set of one or more intensity thresholds includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold.
- a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation
- a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation
- a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation.
- a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.
- a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
- a touch-sensitive surface receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, at which point the intensity of the contact increases.
- the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location).
- a smoothing algorithm is applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact.
- the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm.
- these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
- the intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface is characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds, such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity thresholds.
- the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad.
- the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad.
- the device when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold.
- a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected
- these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.
- An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input.
- An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input.
- An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface.
- a decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface.
- the contact-detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is greater than zero.
- one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold.
- the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a “down stroke” of the respective press input).
- the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input).
- the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold).
- the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold.
- the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input).
- the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).
- the descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold.
- the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold.
- FIG. 7A illustrates a block diagram of digital assistant system 700 in accordance with various examples.
- digital assistant system 700 is implemented on a standalone computer system.
- digital assistant system 700 is distributed across multiple computers.
- some of the modules and functions of the digital assistant are divided into a server portion and a client portion, where the client portion resides on one or more user devices (e.g., devices 104, 122, 200, 400, or 600) and communicates with the server portion (e.g., server system 108) through one or more networks, e.g., as shown in FIG. 1.
- digital assistant system 700 is an implementation of server system 108 (and/or DA server 106) shown in FIG. 1.
- digital assistant system 700 is only one example of a digital assistant system, and that digital assistant system 700 can have more or fewer components than shown, can combine two or more components, or can have a different configuration or arrangement of the components.
- the various components shown in FIG. 7A are implemented in hardware, software instructions for execution by one or more processors, firmware, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits, or a combination thereof.
- Digital assistant system 700 includes memory 702, one or more processors 704, input/output (VO) interface 706, and network communications interface 708. These components can communicate with one another over one or more communication buses or signal lines 710.
- processors 704 input/output (VO) interface 706, and network communications interface 708. These components can communicate with one another over one or more communication buses or signal lines 710.
- VO input/output
- memory 702 includes a non-transitory computer-readable medium, such as high-speed random access memory and/or a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium (e.g., one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices).
- a non-transitory computer-readable medium such as high-speed random access memory and/or a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium (e.g., one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices).
- I/O interface 706 couples input/output devices 716 of digital assistant system 700, such as displays, keyboards, touch screens, and microphones, to user interface module 722.
- digital assistant system 700 includes any of the components and I/O communication interfaces described with respect to devices 200, 400, or 600 in FIGS. 2 A, 4A, 6A-6B, respectively.
- digital assistant system 700 represents the server portion of a digital assistant implementation, and can interact with the user through a client-side portion residing on a user device (e.g., devices 104, 200, 400, or 600).
- the network communications interface 708 includes wired communication port(s) 712 and/or wireless transmission and reception circuitry 714.
- the wired communication port(s) receives and send communication signals via one or more wired interfaces, e.g., Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.
- the wireless circuitry 714 receives and sends RF signals and/or optical signals from/to communications networks and other communications devices.
- the wireless communications use any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, such as GSM, EDGE, CDMA, TDMA, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, VoIP, Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol.
- Network communications interface 708 enables communication between digital assistant system 700 with networks, such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN), and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices.
- networks such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN), and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices.
- networks such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN), and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices.
- networks such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN), and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices.
- LAN wireless local area network
- MAN metropolitan area network
- Operating system 718 e.g, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, iOS, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks
- Operating system 718 includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g, memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communications between various hardware, firmware, and software components.
- User interface module 722 receives commands and/or inputs from a user via I/O interface 706 (e.g., from a keyboard, touch screen, pointing device, controller, and/or microphone), and generate user interface objects on a display. User interface module 722 also prepares and delivers outputs (e.g., speech, sound, animation, text, icons, vibrations, haptic feedback, light, etc.) to the user via the I/O interface 706 (e.g., through displays, audio channels, speakers, touch-pads, etc.).
- I/O interface 706 e.g., from a keyboard, touch screen, pointing device, controller, and/or microphone
- outputs e.g., speech, sound, animation, text, icons, vibrations, haptic feedback, light, etc.
- Applications 724 include programs and/or modules that are configured to be executed by one or more processors 704. For example, if the digital assistant system is implemented on a standalone user device, applications 724 include user applications, such as games, a calendar application, a navigation application, or an email application. If digital assistant system 700 is implemented on a server, applications 724 include resource management applications, diagnostic applications, or scheduling applications, for example.
- Memory 702 also stores digital assistant module 726 (or the server portion of a digital assistant).
- digital assistant module 726 includes the following submodules, or a subset or superset thereof: input/output processing module 728, speech-to-text (STT) processing module 730, natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738, and speech synthesis processing module 740.
- STT speech-to-text
- Each of these modules has access to one or more of the following systems or data and models of the digital assistant module 726, or a subset or superset thereof: ontology 760, vocabulary index 744, user data 748, task flow models 754, service models 756, and ASR systems 758.
- the digital assistant can perform at least some of the following: converting speech input into text; identifying a user’s intent expressed in a natural language input received from the user; actively eliciting and obtaining information needed to fully infer the user’s intent (e.g., by disambiguating words, games, intentions, etc.); determining the task flow for fulfilling the inferred intent; and executing the task flow to fulfill the inferred intent.
- I/O processing module 728 interacts with the user through I/O devices 716 in FIG.
- I/O processing module 728 optionally obtains contextual information associated with the user input from the user device, along with or shortly after the receipt of the user input.
- the contextual information includes user-specific data, vocabulary, and/or preferences relevant to the user input.
- the contextual information also includes software and hardware states of the user device at the time the user request is received, and/or information related to the surrounding environment of the user at the time that the user request was received.
- VO processing module 728 also sends follow-up questions to, and receive answers from, the user regarding the user request.
- I/O processing module 728 forwards the speech input to STT processing module 730 (or speech recognizer) for speech-to-text conversions.
- STT processing module 730 includes one or more ASR systems 758.
- the one or more ASR systems 758 can process the speech input that is received through I/O processing module 728 to produce a recognition result.
- Each ASR system 758 includes a front-end speech pre-processor.
- the front-end speech pre-processor extracts representative features from the speech input. For example, the front-end speech pre-processor performs a Fourier transform on the speech input to extract spectral features that characterize the speech input as a sequence of representative multi-dimensional vectors.
- each ASR system 758 includes one or more speech recognition models (e.g., acoustic models and/or language models) and implements one or more speech recognition engines.
- Examples of speech recognition models include Hidden Markov Models, Gaussian-Mixture Models, Deep Neural Network Models, n-gram language models, and other statistical models.
- Examples of speech recognition engines include the dynamic time warping based engines and weighted finite- state transducers (WFST) based engines.
- the one or more speech recognition models and the one or more speech recognition engines are used to process the extracted representative features of the front-end speech pre-processor to produce intermediate recognitions results (e.g., phonemes, phonemic strings, and sub-words), and ultimately, text recognition results (e.g., words, word strings, or sequence of tokens).
- the speech input is processed at least partially by a third-party service or on the user’s device (e.g., device 104, 200, 400, or 600) to produce the recognition result.
- a third-party service e.g., device 104, 200, 400, or 600
- the recognition result is passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction.
- STT processing module 730 produces multiple candidate text representations of the speech input. Each candidate text representation is a sequence of words or tokens corresponding to the speech input. In some examples, each candidate text representation is associated with a speech recognition confidence score.
- STT processing module 730 includes and/or accesses a vocabulary of recognizable words via phonetic alphabet conversion module 731.
- Each vocabulary word is associated with one or more candidate pronunciations of the word represented in a speech recognition phonetic alphabet.
- the vocabulary of recognizable words includes a word that is associated with a plurality of candidate pronunciations.
- the vocabulary includes the word “tomato” that is associated with the candidate pronunciations of /ta'meirou/ and /ta'matoo/.
- vocabulary words are associated with custom candidate pronunciations that are based on previous speech inputs from the user.
- Such custom candidate pronunciations are stored in STT processing module 730 and are associated with a particular user via the user’s profile on the device.
- the candidate pronunciations for words are determined based on the spelling of the word and one or more linguistic and/or phonetic rules.
- the candidate pronunciations are manually generated, e.g., based on known canonical pronunciations.
- the candidate pronunciations are ranked based on the commonness of the candidate pronunciation. For example, the candidate pronunciation /ta'meirou/ is ranked higher than /ta'motou/, because the former is a more commonly used pronunciation (e.g., among all users, for users in a particular geographical region, or for any other appropriate subset of users).
- candidate pronunciations are ranked based on whether the candidate pronunciation is a custom candidate pronunciation associated with the user. For example, custom candidate pronunciations are ranked higher than canonical candidate pronunciations. This can be useful for recognizing proper nouns having a unique pronunciation that deviates from canonical pronunciation.
- candidate pronunciations are associated with one or more speech characteristics, such as geographic origin, nationality, or ethnicity.
- the candidate pronunciation /ta'meirou/ is associated with the United States
- the candidate pronunciation /to' mat 00/ is associated with Great Britain.
- the rank of the candidate pronunciation is based on one or more characteristics (e.g., geographic origin, nationality, ethnicity, etc.) of the user stored in the user’s profile on the device. For example, it can be determined from the user’s profile that the user is associated with the United States.
- the candidate pronunciation /ta'meirou/ (associated with the United States) is ranked higher than the candidate pronunciation /ta'matoo/ (associated with Great Britain).
- one of the ranked candidate pronunciations is selected as a predicted pronunciation (e.g., the most likely pronunciation).
- STT processing module 730 is used to determine the phonemes corresponding to the speech input (e.g., using an acoustic model), and then attempt to determine words that match the phonemes (e.g., using a language model). For example, if STT processing module 730 first identifies the sequence of phonemes /ta'meirou/ corresponding to a portion of the speech input, it can then determine, based on vocabulary index 744, that this sequence corresponds to the word “tomato.”
- STT processing module 730 uses approximate matching techniques to determine words in an utterance. Thus, for example, the STT processing module 730 determines that the sequence of phonemes /ta'meirou/ corresponds to the word “tomato,” even if that particular sequence of phonemes is not one of the candidate sequence of phonemes for that word.
- Natural language processing module 732 (“natural language processor”) of the digital assistant takes the n-best candidate text representation(s) (“word sequence(s)” or “token sequence(s)”) generated by STT processing module 730, and attempts to associate each of the candidate text representations with one or more “actionable intents” recognized by the digital assistant.
- An “actionable intent” (or “user intent”) represents a task that can be performed by the digital assistant, and can have an associated task flow implemented in task flow models 754.
- the associated task flow is a series of programmed actions and steps that the digital assistant takes in order to perform the task.
- the scope of a digital assistant is dependent on the number and variety of task flows that have been implemented and stored in task flow models 754, or in other words, on the number and variety of “actionable intents” that the digital assistant recognizes.
- the effectiveness of the digital assistant also dependents on the assistant’s ability to infer the correct “actionable intent(s)” from the user request expressed in natural language.
- natural language processing module 732 in addition to the sequence of words or tokens obtained from STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732 also receives contextual information associated with the user request, e.g., from I/O processing module 728.
- the natural language processing module 732 optionally uses the contextual information to clarify, supplement, and/or further define the information contained in the candidate text representations received from STT processing module 730.
- the contextual information includes, for example, user preferences, hardware, and/or software states of the user device, sensor information collected before, during, or shortly after the user request, prior interactions (e.g., dialogue) between the digital assistant and the user, and the like.
- contextual information is, in some examples, dynamic, and changes with time, location, content of the dialogue, and other factors.
- the natural language processing is based on, e.g., ontology 760.
- Ontology 760 is a hierarchical structure containing many nodes, each node representing either an “actionable intent” or a “property” relevant to one or more of the “actionable intents” or other “properties.”
- an “actionable intent” represents a task that the digital assistant is capable of performing, i.e., it is “actionable” or can be acted on.
- a “property” represents a parameter associated with an actionable intent or a sub-aspect of another property.
- a linkage between an actionable intent node and a property node in ontology 760 defines how a parameter represented by the property node pertains to the task represented by the actionable intent node.
- ontology 760 is made up of actionable intent nodes and property nodes.
- each actionable intent node is linked to one or more property nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes.
- each property node is linked to one or more actionable intent nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes.
- ontology 760 includes a “restaurant reservation” node (i.e., an actionable intent node).
- Property nodes “restaurant,” “date/time” (for the reservation), and “party size” are each directly linked to the actionable intent node (i.e., the “restaurant reservation” node).
- property nodes “cuisine,” “price range,” “phone number,” and “location” are sub-nodes of the property node “restaurant,” and are each linked to the “restaurant reservation” node (i.e., the actionable intent node) through the intermediate property node “restaurant.”
- ontology 760 also includes a “set reminder” node (i.e., another actionable intent node).
- Property nodes “date/time” (for setting the reminder) and “subject” (for the reminder) are each linked to the “set reminder” node.
- the property node “date/time” is linked to both the “restaurant reservation” node and the “set reminder” node in ontology 760.
- An actionable intent node along with its linked property nodes, is described as a “domain.”
- each domain is associated with a respective actionable intent, and refers to the group of nodes (and the relationships there between) associated with the particular actionable intent.
- ontology 760 shown in FIG. 7C includes an example of restaurant reservation domain 762 and an example of reminder domain 764 within ontology 760.
- the restaurant reservation domain includes the actionable intent node “restaurant reservation,” property nodes “restaurant,” “date/time,” and “party size,” and subproperty nodes “cuisine,” “price range,” “phone number,” and “location.”
- Reminder domain 764 includes the actionable intent node “set reminder,” and property nodes “subject” and “date/time.”
- ontology 760 is made up of many domains. Each domain shares one or more property nodes with one or more other domains.
- the “date/time” property node is associated with many different domains (e.g., a scheduling domain, a travel reservation domain, a movie ticket domain, etc.), in addition to restaurant reservation domain 762 and reminder domain 764.
- FIG. 7C illustrates two example domains within ontology 760
- other domains include, for example, “find a movie,” “initiate a phone call,” “find directions,” “schedule a meeting,” “send a message,” and “provide an answer to a question,” “read a list,” “providing navigation instructions,” “provide instructions for a task” and so on.
- a “send a message” domain is associated with a “send a message” actionable intent node, and further includes property nodes such as “recipient(s),” “message type,” and “message body.”
- the property node “recipient” is further defined, for example, by the sub-property nodes such as “recipient name” and “message address.”
- ontology 760 includes all the domains (and hence actionable intents) that the digital assistant is capable of understanding and acting upon.
- ontology 760 is modified, such as by adding or removing entire domains or nodes, or by modifying relationships between the nodes within the ontology 760.
- nodes associated with multiple related actionable intents are clustered under a “super domain” in ontology 760.
- a “travel” super-domain includes a cluster of property nodes and actionable intent nodes related to travel.
- the actionable intent nodes related to travel includes “airline reservation,” “hotel reservation,” “car rental,” “get directions,” “find points of interest,” and so on.
- the actionable intent nodes under the same super domain (e.g., the “travel” super domain) have many property nodes in common.
- the actionable intent nodes for “airline reservation,” “hotel reservation,” “car rental,” “get directions,” and “find points of interest” share one or more of the property nodes “start location,” “destination,” “departure date/time,” “arrival date/time,” and “party size.”
- each node in ontology 760 is associated with a set of words and/or phrases that are relevant to the property or actionable intent represented by the node.
- the respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node are the so-called “vocabulary” associated with the node.
- the respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node are stored in vocabulary index 744 in association with the property or actionable intent represented by the node. For example, returning to FIG. 7B, the vocabulary associated with the node for the property of “restaurant” includes words such as “food,” “drinks,” “cuisine,” “hungry,” “eat,” “pizza,” “fast food,” “meal,” and so on.
- the vocabulary associated with the node for the actionable intent of “initiate a phone call” includes words and phrases such as “call,” “phone,” “dial,” “ring,” “call this number,” “make a call to,” and so on.
- the vocabulary index 744 optionally includes words and phrases in different languages.
- Natural language processing module 732 receives the candidate text representations (e.g., text string(s) or token sequence(s)) from STT processing module 730, and for each candidate representation, determines what nodes are implicated by the words in the candidate text representation. In some examples, if a word or phrase in the candidate text representation is found to be associated with one or more nodes in ontology 760 (via vocabulary index 744), the word or phrase “triggers” or “activates” those nodes. Based on the quantity and/or relative importance of the activated nodes, natural language processing module 732 selects one of the actionable intents as the task that the user intended the digital assistant to perform. In some examples, the domain that has the most “triggered” nodes is selected.
- the candidate text representations e.g., text string(s) or token sequence(s)
- the domain having the highest confidence value (e.g., based on the relative importance of its various triggered nodes) is selected. In some examples, the domain is selected based on a combination of the number and the importance of the triggered nodes. In some examples, additional factors are considered in selecting the node as well, such as whether the digital assistant has previously correctly interpreted a similar request from a user.
- User data 748 includes user-specific information, such as user-specific vocabulary, user preferences, user address, user’s default and secondary languages, user’s contact list, and other short-term or long-term information for each user.
- natural language processing module 732 uses the user-specific information to supplement the information contained in the user input to further define the user intent. For example, for a user request “invite my friends to my birthday party,” natural language processing module 732 is able to access user data 748 to determine who the “friends” are and when and where the “birthday party” would be held, rather than requiring the user to provide such information explicitly in his/her request.
- natural language processing module 732 is implemented using one or more machine learning mechanisms (e.g., neural networks).
- the one or more machine learning mechanisms are configured to receive a candidate text representation and contextual information associated with the candidate text representation. Based on the candidate text representation and the associated contextual information, the one or more machine learning mechanisms are configured to determine intent confidence scores over a set of candidate actionable intents.
- Natural language processing module 732 can select one or more candidate actionable intents from the set of candidate actionable intents based on the determined intent confidence scores.
- an ontology e.g., ontology 760 is also used to select the one or more candidate actionable intents from the set of candidate actionable intents.
- natural language processing module 732 identifies an actionable intent (or domain) based on the user request
- natural language processing module 732 generates a structured query to represent the identified actionable intent.
- the structured query includes parameters for one or more nodes within the domain for the actionable intent, and at least some of the parameters are populated with the specific information and requirements specified in the user request. For example, the user says “Make me a dinner reservation at a sushi place at 7.” In this case, natural language processing module 732 is able to correctly identify the actionable intent to be “restaurant reservation” based on the user input.
- a structured query for a “restaurant reservation” domain includes parameters such as ⁇ Cuisine ⁇ , ⁇ Time ⁇ , ⁇ Date ⁇ , ⁇ Party Size ⁇ , and the like.
- the user’ s utterance contains insufficient information to complete the structured query associated with the domain. Therefore, other necessary parameters such as ⁇ Party Size ⁇ and ⁇ Date ⁇ are not specified in the structured query based on the information currently available.
- natural language processing module 732 populates some parameters of the structured query with received contextual information. For example, in some examples, if the user requested a sushi restaurant “near me,” natural language processing module 732 populates a ⁇ location ⁇ parameter in the structured query with GPS coordinates from the user device.
- natural language processing module 732 identifies multiple candidate actionable intents for each candidate text representation received from STT processing module 730. Further, in some examples, a respective structured query (partial or complete) is generated for each identified candidate actionable intent. Natural language processing module 732 determines an intent confidence score for each candidate actionable intent and ranks the candidate actionable intents based on the intent confidence scores. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 passes the generated structured query (or queries), including any completed parameters, to task flow processing module 736 (“task flow processor”). In some examples, the structured query (or queries) for the m-best (e.g., m highest ranked) candidate actionable intents are provided to task flow processing module 736, where m is a predetermined integer greater than zero. In some examples, the structured query (or queries) for the m-best candidate actionable intents are provided to task flow processing module 736 with the corresponding candidate text representation(s).
- Task flow processing module 736 is configured to receive the structured query (or queries) from natural language processing module 732, complete the structured query, if necessary, and perform the actions required to “complete” the user’s ultimate request.
- the various procedures necessary to complete these tasks are provided in task flow models 754.
- task flow models 754 include procedures for obtaining additional information from the user and task flows for performing actions associated with the actionable intent.
- task flow processing module 736 needs to initiate additional dialogue with the user in order to obtain additional information, and/or disambiguate potentially ambiguous utterances.
- task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing module 734 to engage in a dialogue with the user.
- dialogue flow processing module 734 determines how (and/or when) to ask the user for the additional information and receives and processes the user responses. The questions are provided to and answers are received from the users through I/O processing module 728.
- dialogue flow processing module 734 presents dialogue output to the user via audio and/or visual output, and receives input from the user via spoken or physical (e.g., clicking) responses.
- dialogue flow processing module 734 when task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing module 734 to determine the “party size” and “date” information for the structured query associated with the domain “restaurant reservation,” dialogue flow processing module 734 generates questions such as “For how many people?” and “On which day?” to pass to the user. Once answers are received from the user, dialogue flow processing module 734 then populates the structured query with the missing information, or pass the information to task flow processing module 736 to complete the missing information from the structured query.
- task flow processing module 736 proceeds to perform the ultimate task associated with the actionable intent. Accordingly, task flow processing module 736 executes the steps and instructions in the task flow model according to the specific parameters contained in the structured query.
- the task flow model for the actionable intent of “restaurant reservation” includes steps and instructions for contacting a restaurant and actually requesting a reservation for a particular party size at a particular time.
- task flow processing module 736 performs the steps of: (1) logging onto a server of the ABC cafe or a restaurant reservation system such as OPENTABLE®, (2) entering the date, time, and party size information in a form on the website, (3) submitting the form, and (4) making a calendar entry for the reservation in the user’s calendar.
- task flow processing module 736 employs the assistance of service processing module 738 (“service processing module”) to complete a task requested in the user input or to provide an informational answer requested in the user input.
- service processing module 738 acts on behalf of task flow processing module 736 to make a phone call, set a calendar entry, invoke a map search, invoke or interact with other user applications installed on the user device, and invoke or interact with third-party services (e.g., a restaurant reservation portal, a social networking website, a banking portal, etc.).
- the protocols and application programming interfaces (API) required by each service are specified by a respective service model among service models 756.
- Service processing module 738 accesses the appropriate service model for a service and generates requests for the service in accordance with the protocols and APIs required by the service according to the service model.
- service processing module 738 establishes a network connection with the online reservation service using the web address stored in the service model, and sends the necessary parameters of the reservation (e.g., time, date, party size) to the online reservation interface in a format according to the API of the online reservation service.
- natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, and task flow processing module 736 are used collectively and iteratively to infer and define the user’s intent, obtain information to further clarify and refine the user intent, and finally generate a response (i.e., an output to the user, or the completion of a task) to fulfill the user’s intent.
- the generated response is a dialogue response to the speech input that at least partially fulfills the user’s intent. Further, in some examples, the generated response is output as a speech output.
- the generated response is sent to speech synthesis processing module 740 (e.g., speech synthesizer) where it can be processed to synthesize the dialogue response in speech form.
- the generated response is data content relevant to satisfying a user request in the speech input.
- task flow processing module 736 receives multiple structured queries from natural language processing module 732, task flow processing module 736 initially processes the first structured query of the received structured queries to attempt to complete the first structured query and/or execute one or more tasks or actions represented by the first structured query.
- the first structured query corresponds to the highest ranked actionable intent.
- the first structured query is selected from the received structured queries based on a combination of the corresponding speech recognition confidence scores and the corresponding intent confidence scores.
- task flow processing module 736 can proceed to select and process a second structured query of the received structured queries that corresponds to a lower ranked actionable intent.
- the second structured query is selected, for example, based on the speech recognition confidence score of the corresponding candidate text representation, the intent confidence score of the corresponding candidate actionable intent, a missing necessary parameter in the first structured query, or any combination thereof.
- Speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to synthesize speech outputs for presentation to the user. Speech synthesis processing module 740 synthesizes speech outputs based on text provided by the digital assistant. For example, the generated dialogue response is in the form of a text string. Speech synthesis processing module 740 converts the text string to an audible speech output. Speech synthesis processing module 740 uses any appropriate speech synthesis technique in order to generate speech outputs from text, including, but not limited, to concatenative synthesis, unit selection synthesis, diphone synthesis, domain-specific synthesis, formant synthesis, articulatory synthesis, hidden Markov model (HMM) based synthesis, and sinewave synthesis.
- HMM hidden Markov model
- speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to synthesize individual words based on phonemic strings corresponding to the words. For example, a phonemic string is associated with a word in the generated dialogue response. The phonemic string is stored in metadata associated with the word. Speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to directly process the phonemic string in the metadata to synthesize the word in speech form.
- speech synthesis is performed on a remote device (e.g., the server system 108), and the synthesized speech is sent to the user device for output to the user. For example, this can occur in some implementations where outputs for a digital assistant are generated at a server system. And because server systems generally have more processing power or resources than a user device, it is possible to obtain higher quality speech outputs than would be practical with client-side synthesis.
- content is automatically generated by one or more computers in response to a request to generate the content.
- the automatically-generated content is optionally generated on-device (e.g., generated at least in part by a computer system at which a request to generate the content is received) and/or generated off-device (e.g., generated at least in part by one or more nearby computers that are available via a local network or one or more computers that are available via the internet).
- This automatically-generated content optionally includes visual content (e.g., images, graphics, and/or video), audio content, and/or text content.
- An Al process optionally includes one or more post-processing steps to adjust the output by the Al model (e.g., passing Al model output to a different Al model, upscaling, downscaling, cropping, formatting, and/or adding or removing metadata) before the output of the Al model used for other purposes such as being provided to a different software process for further processing or being presented (e.g., visually or audibly) to a user.
- An Al process that generates generative content is sometimes referred to as a generative Al process.
- a prompt for generating generative content can include one or more of: one or more words (e.g., a natural language prompt that is written or spoken), one or more images, one or more drawings, and/or one or more videos.
- Al processes can include machine learning models including neural networks. Neural networks can include transformer-based deep neural networks such as large language models (LLMs). Generative pre-trained transformer models are a type of LLM that can be effective at generating novel generative content based on a prompt. Some Al processes use a prompt that includes text to generate either different generative text, generative audio content, and/or generative visual content.
- Some Al processes use a prompt that includes visual content and/or an audio content to generate generative text (e.g., a transcription of audio and/or a description of the visual content).
- Some multi-modal Al processes use a prompt that includes multiple types of content (e.g., text, images, audio, video, and/or other sensor data) to generate generative content.
- a prompt sometimes also includes values for one or more parameters indicating an importance of various parts of the prompt.
- Some prompts include a structured set of instructions that can be understood by an Al process that include phrasing, a specified style, relevant context (e.g., starting point content and/or one or more examples), and/or a role for the Al process.
- Generative content is generally based on the prompt but is not deterministically selected from pre-generated content and is, instead, generated using the prompt as a starting point.
- pre-existing content e.g., audio, text, and/or visual content
- the pre-existing content is used as a starting point for creating the generative content.
- a prompt could request that a block of text be summarized or rewritten in a different tone, and the output would be generative text that is summarized or written in the different tone.
- a prompt could request that visual content be modified to include or exclude content specified by a prompt (e.g., removing an identified feature in the visual content, adding a feature to the visual content that is described in a prompt, changing a visual style of the visual content, and/or creating additional visual elements outside of a spatial or temporal boundary of the visual content that are based on the visual content).
- a random or pseudo-random seed is used as part of the prompt for creating generative content (e.g., the random or pseud-random seed content is used as a starting point for creating the generative content).
- a random noise pattern is iteratively denoised based on the prompt to generate an image that is based on the prompt. While specific types of Al processes have been described herein, it should be understood that a variety of different Al processes could be used to generate generative content based on a prompt.
- FIGS. 8A-8E and 9A-9C illustrate systems for commands using secondary device gestures.
- device 802 may include any device described herein, including but not limited to devices 104, 200, 400, and 600 (FIGS. 1, 2A, 4 A, and 6A-6B).
- device 802 associated with FIGS. 8A-8E and 9A-9C may correspond to a user device, such as a laptop computer, tablet, phone, and the like.
- Device 804 may correspond to a wearable device such as headphones, smart glasses, or a head-mounted display for example.
- the processes described herein may be performed by a server with information delivered to and from the device, performed on the device, or a combination thereof.
- the motion data may remain on the secondary device and audio events may be generated by and played by the second device accordingly.
- the first electronic device and the second electronic device may be retained within a singular device (e.g., a head-mounted display with microphone, speakers, etc.).
- a user may interact with a plurality of devices within environment 800, such as devices 802 and 804, within the context of a gesture-response framework.
- Device 802 may correspond to a smartphone and device 804 may correspond to a plurality of headphones or earbuds.
- Devices 802 and 804 may further be communicatively coupled via one or more wireless connections.
- user 806 may utilize devices 802 and 804 to perform various functions, such as listen to music, engage in communication sessions (e.g., telephone calls, text messaging, video calls, etc.), interact with a digital assistant, and the like.
- device 802 may receive a phone call from another electronic device, such that the caller leaves a voicemail when user 806 does not answer the call.
- the caller may correspond to a contact stored on device 802, such as a contact named “John.”
- device 802 may detect an event alert corresponding to the received voicemail.
- user 806 may not be actively using device 802 (e.g., device 802 is locked and/or resting on a surface away from the user). In such cases, device 802 may then provide a message to user 806 by way of device 804.
- audible message 808 may be provided at device 804, such as “You have a new voicemail from John. Would you like to listen?”
- audible message 808 includes a question or interrogatory for the user to respond to.
- the question may be optional in nature such that the user is not required to provide a response. For instance, if the user does not take any action on the prompt, device 802 may infer that the user does not wish to proceed with the respective task (e.g., listening to a voicemail), and thus, device 802 takes no action.
- the event alert and corresponding message may include a variety of different types of alerts and potential actions, such as incoming calls, incoming text messages, reminders associated with one or more applications (e.g., calendars, social media, lifestyle, productivity), alarms, application notifications, and the like.
- applications e.g., calendars, social media, lifestyle, productivity
- alarms e.g., application notifications, and the like.
- message 808 provided to device 804 may include a summary or brief explanation of the event alert.
- the message may include contents such as “You have a new long text message from Mary. Would you like to hear it?”
- the message may include the contents of the received message (e.g., if the received message is less than a predefined character length) and a prompt to perform a related task, such as “John says ‘Are you coming?’ would you like to respond?”
- Messages may also be received at device 802 from a plurality of users, such as a predefined group within a messaging application.
- the message provided to device 804 may include contents such as “There are ten new messages in the group chat.
- device 802 may begin receiving motion data from device 804.
- the motion data may correspond to motion of device 804 as the user makes various movements, such as head gestures corresponding to affirmative actions (e.g., acceptances) or negative actions (e.g., rejections).
- device 804 may include one or more inertial measurement units (IMU) which may provide various measurements such as rotation rates and acceleration rates of device 804.
- IMU inertial measurement units
- the IMU information may reflect the user’s head movements via the acceleration and rotation rates in the form of X, Y, and Z coordinate information, for example.
- the motion data may then be received at device 802 such that device 802 then processes the motion data in order to classify the data.
- the motion data may be sampled, for example, at a rate of 25 Hz with prediction window sizes of 20, 25, or 30 samples.
- the motion data may be provided to a classifier which determines a label for the motion data, such as labels for “Yes” (e.g., a gesture consistent with a nod or other confirmatory gesture), “No” (e.g., a gesture consistent with a back and forth shake or other rejection-type gesture), or “No Gesture,” indicating that the motion data does not correspond to a “Yes” or “No” gesture with sufficient confidence.
- a label for the motion data such as labels for “Yes” (e.g., a gesture consistent with a nod or other confirmatory gesture), “No” (e.g., a gesture consistent with a back and forth shake or other rejection-type gesture), or “No Gesture,” indicating that the motion data does not correspond to a “Yes” or “No” gesture with sufficient confidence.
- Each set of received motion data may be used to obtain a motion classification probability associated with a particular gesture. For example, if user 806 performs a head nod gesture as shown in FIG. 8B, the class
- the classifier may assign a label to the motion data for “No” “No Gesture” as having low confidences (e.g., 0.05 and 0.02, respectively). To the extent a label exceeds a threshold confidence (e.g., 85%), the corresponding motion data may be classified based on the corresponding label (e.g., “Yes” in this example).
- a threshold confidence e.g., 85%
- an announce tone 810a may be provided at device 804.
- the respective message 812a is provided at device 804, such as “New long message from Justin. Listen now?”.
- continuous audible sound 814a is provided to device 804 in order to indicate to the user that devices 802 and/or 804 are waiting for and actively detecting whether a gesture input is performed by the user.
- Continuous audible sound 814a may be provided for a predetermined amount of time (e.g., 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) and may include a soft continuous tone such that the user is made aware that the device is in a “listening mode” or “waiting loop.”
- devices 802 and/or 804 may begin actively detecting whether a gesture input is performed prior to continuous audible sound 814a being provided, such as when announce tone 810a begins to be provided or when message 812a begins to be provided.
- device 804 may provide one or more initial audible messages to the user (e.g., during device setup, prior to or after a message is received, etc.) informing the user that the user may respond to various messaging using head gestures (e.g., “You can respond to this message by nodding or shaking your head.”).
- Device 802 may also provide various displayed and/or audible messages including training for the user to inform the user of device capabilities with respect to head gestures.
- device 802 may receive motion data from device 804 and determine one or more gestures based on the motion data as described with respect to FIGS. 8B-8C. To the extent device 802 determines a respective gesture with sufficient confidence, a confirmation sound 816a is provided at device 804. For instance, if user 806 performs a gesture consistent with a nod or other confirmatory gesture, a positive confirmation sound may be provided (e.g., a light chime, ring, or other sound).
- a confirmation sound 816a is provided at device 804. For instance, if user 806 performs a gesture consistent with a nod or other confirmatory gesture, a positive confirmation sound may be provided (e.g., a light chime, ring, or other sound).
- a negative confirmation sound may be provided, such as a tone that is inverted (e.g., inverted in tone, melody, or other acoustic characteristics) relative to the positive confirmation sound.
- continuous audible sound 814a may stop being provided in order to indicate that device 804 is no longer listening for a gesture-type input.
- user 806 may not perform any gestures which are determined to have a high enough confidence to be confirmatory -type or rejection-type gestures. In such cases, continuous audible sound 814a may continue to be provided for the predetermined duration.
- continuous audible sound 814a may stop being provided in order to indicate that device 804 is no longer listening for a gesture-type input.
- a confirmation sound may be provided at the end of the predetermined duration, while in other examples, continuous audible sound 814a is ended without a confirmation sound.
- dynamic feedback may be provided to indicate detection progress with respect to an individual gesture being detected.
- announce tone 810b, message 812b, and continuous audible sound 814b are provided as described with respect to FIG. 8D.
- continuous audible sound 814b is provided
- gesture feedback 818b is also provided to device 804.
- Gesture feedback 818b may generally include a plurality of short discrete tones (referred to as “pings,” “tinks,” etc.) to indicate the detection progress of an overall gesture. For instance, user 806 may begin to make a “nod” gesture, such that the user tilts the user’s head upwards.
- a first partial gesture (e.g., head movement upwards) may thus be detected by device 802 based on respective partial gesture criteria, such as whether the rotation rates and acceleration data correspond to a head movement upwards.
- heuristics based on the velocity of head motions is also used to trigger the partial gesture feedback.
- the velocity of head motions which are consistent with the user moving their head upwards for example, can be used to detect corresponding partial gestures.
- a first tone may be provided to device 804 to indicate the first initial movement point of the respective “nod” gesture.
- a second partial gesture e.g., head movement downwards
- respective partial gesture criteria such as whether the rotation rates and acceleration data correspond to a head movement downwards.
- a second tone is provided to device 804 indicate the second movement point of the respective “nod” gesture.
- additional short discrete tones may continue to be provided throughout the duration of the gesture (e.g., a third tone provided for another head movement upwards, a fourth tone provided for another head movement downwards, etc.).
- Each successive audible tone may be distinct from the other audible tones.
- a first audible tone of gesture feedback 818b may be relatively lower in volume, tone, intensity, or other acoustic features.
- a second audible tone may be slightly or moderately higher in volume, tone, intensity, or other acoustic features than the first audible tone.
- a third audible tone may be slightly or moderately sufficiently higher in volume, tone, intensity, or other acoustic features than the second audible tone. This pattern may continue for each audible tone of gesture feedback 818b.
- device 802 may eventually reset listening and thus begin listening for new gestures within the waiting loop period.
- an output is provided at device 804 based on the gesture, and a respective task associated with the event alert and/or the message is performed.
- a respective task associated with the event alert and/or the message is performed.
- user 806 may perform a “nod” gesture.
- an acceptancetype confirmatory tone is provided at device 804 as discussed with respect to FIGS. 8D-8E.
- a corresponding task is performed based on the user’s acceptance gesture input. Specifically, in this case, device 802 may deliver the voicemail audio to device 804.
- user 806 may perform a back-and-forth head shake gesture.
- a rejection -type confirmatory tone is provided at device 804 as discussed with respect to FIGS. 8D-8E.
- a corresponding task is performed based on the user’s rejection gesture input.
- device 802 may provide a brief follow-up confirmation of the rejection, such as “Okay,” or “Got it.”
- the rejection-type confirmatory tone is provided without any additional audible output, such that device 802 ceases to receive the motion data from device 804 and accordingly, ceases to detect corresponding gestures.
- Various other tasks may be performed depending on the event alert and corresponding message, such as connecting an audio call from device 802 to device 804, transmitting a message from device 802 (e.g., text message or e-mail based on dictation from user 806 at device 804), creating or modifying a calendar entry, reading an application notification, and the like.
- the gesture-response framework may be implemented in a variety of ways. For instance, instead of (or in addition to) utilizing the “listening mode” or “waiting loop,” one or more discrete tones or other type of indication(s) may be provided to the user to indicate that additional content can be provided if the user provides a confirmatory -type gesture.
- an announce tone 810c may be provided at the second electronic device prior to message 812c being provided.
- Message 812c may include a general subject, topic, or other information summarizing the contents of a received message.
- the message summary is provided when the message contents exceed a particular length (e.g., word count, character count, etc.).
- message 812c may include an audible output such as “New message from Ron about lunch plans.”
- the message summary may be generated based on various natural language processing techniques to identify concepts or other keywords within the text.
- Tone 820c may include one or more discrete tones that vary in volume, intensity, pitch, etc.
- the gesture-response framework may be utilized to provide contextual response suggestions based on an incoming message. Additional details on providing contextual response suggestions based on an incoming message can be found in U.S. Utility Application No. 18/373,211, entitled “Contextual Response Suggestions Using Secondary Electronic Device,” filed September 26, 2023, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/462,956, entitled “Contextual Response Suggestions Using Secondary Electronic Device,” filed April 28, 2023, the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the current flight status information is then used to prepare a response message to be sent back to the message sender “John.”
- the flight status information may include “On time, arriving at 8:20PM today.”
- the second portion of the message provided to the second electronic device may thus include prepared response message “My flight arrives at 8:20PM.”
- the device may begin receiving motion data and determine a gesture based on the motion data. To the extent a rejection -type gesture is determined, the first device may optionally provide an output indicating the rejection-type gesture was detected and then take no further action on the received message.
- the first device may transmit the corresponding prepared response message as a message to the message sender (e.g., “On time, arriving at 8:20PM today ”), and provide an output at the second device indicating the message was sent.
- the message sender e.g., “On time, arriving at 8:20PM today ”
- the gesture-response framework may also be used in order to confirm one or more options provided by the digital assistant. For instance, the user may have dictated a message to be sent to another contact stored on the user’s device. Once the message has been dictated, the digital assistant may ask the user for confirmation, such as “Okay, the message says ‘I’ll be there soon.’ Send it?” The user may then respond to the question as using either a confirmatory -type gesture or rejection-type gesture as discussed herein. If the device detects the confirmatory-type gesture, the message is sent to the respective user. If the device detects the rejection-type gesture, the device does not send the message. The user may also respond via other various modalities such as touch input and/or voice input.
- an environment 900 is depicted including a user utilizing an early dismissal framework, such that audible outputs may be aborted based on user gestures.
- user 906 may utilize devices 902 and 904 as described with respect to FIGS. 8A-8B.
- Message 908 may be received at device 904 corresponding to an event alert detected at device 902.
- message 908 may include an audible output “New long message from John. John says ‘Thanks for reaching out. My initial thoughts are . . . ’”
- message 908 may continue to be read out until a rejection-type gesture is detected from user 906.
- an informational prompt may be provided to device 804 indicating that message read-outs may be aborted if the user performed a specific gesture, such as a rejection-type gesture (e.g., “You can dismiss this message by shaking your head.”).
- a rejection-type gesture e.g., “You can dismiss this message by shaking your head.”.
- user 906 may perform a gesture such as a back-and-forth head shake. Accordingly, device 906 may determine a rejection -type gesture being performed by user 906 based on the motion data received from device 904. More specifically, an initial announce tone 908 is provided at device 904, wherein once the announce tone 908 is provided, device 902 begins receiving motion data from device 904 and accordingly begins determining whether user 906 has performed a gesture. The gesture determination at device 902 may occur concurrently or otherwise in parallel with the read-out of message 910 at device 904.
- a corresponding task is performed at device 902. Specifically, device 902 stops providing message 910 to device 904.
- a confirmation sound 912 may also be provided at device 904 (e.g., a short audible tone) as message 910 ceases to be provided (e.g., slightly before, at the same time, or slightly after message 910 ceases to be provided).
- device 902 will continue to read out message 910 until either the message read-out has completed or device 902 detects a rejection-type gesture.
- the dynamic feedback discussed with respect to FIG. 8E may also be employed to indicate detection progress with respect to an individual gesture being detected.
- the early dismissal framework may not be employed under certain circumstances.
- some messages provided at device 904 may include questions or other prompts which solicit either a positive response or negative response from the user.
- a scenario involving a message including interrogatory sentence or phrase e.g., “You have ten events scheduled today. Would you like to hear them?”
- a plurality of predetermined potential user responses e.g., Yes, No
- This determination may be made at device 902 at the time of detecting the event alert and generating the corresponding message for delivery at device 904, for example.
- device 902 will not cease reading out a respective message in response to detecting of a rejection-type gesture, but rather, with perform a respective task based on the rejection-type gesture (e.g., device 902 will forgo reading out today’s events). Likewise, in such a scenario, device 902 will also listen for acceptance-type gestures and perform appropriate tasks, as described with respect to FIGS. 8A-8E.
- the early dismissal framework may be employed. Once device 902 determines that the question prompt has been provided soliciting a positive or negative response, the early dismissal framework may no longer apply, such that the gesture-response framework described with respect to FIGS. 8A-8E now applies.
- the early dismissal framework discussed above can be utilized in a variety of use cases.
- the user may be engaged in a back-and-forth interaction with a digital assistant, such that the user has uttered a command and the digital assistant is in the process of responding to the command, such as by outputting an audible response “Okay, I found a few restaurants for you. ABC Diner is a favorite ... .”
- the user may begin to shake their head consistent with a rejection-type gesture.
- the digital assistant may cease providing the audible output.
- FIGS. 10-11 illustrate processes 1000 and 1100 for contextual response suggestions according to various examples.
- Processes 1000 and 1100 are performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a digital assistant.
- processes 1000 and 1100 are performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of processes 1000 and 1100 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device.
- the blocks of processes 1000 and 1100 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch).
- processes 1000 and 1100 are not so limited. In other examples, processes 1000 and 1100 are performed using only a client device (e.g., user device 104) or only multiple client devices. In processes 1000 and 1100, some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with processes 1000 and 1100.
- a first electronic device detects an event alert.
- the event alert corresponds to one of an incoming call, an incoming text message, a reminder, and an application notification.
- the first electronic device causes a message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert.
- the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message
- the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert corresponds to an indication that the incoming text message exceeds a threshold character length.
- the incoming text message corresponds to a group text message, and wherein the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert includes an option to silence the group text message.
- the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message that does not exceed a threshold character length and the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert includes the contents of the incoming text message.
- the first electronic device in response to causing (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) the message to be provided at the second electronic device, causes a continuous audible sound to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein the continuous audible sound is provided for a predetermined period of time.
- the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message, and the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert includes a subject of the incoming text message.
- causing the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) to be provided at the second electronic device includes causing a first portion of the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein the first portion of the message includes at least a portion of the contents of an incoming text message, and causing a second portion of the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein the second portion of the message includes a prompt indicating a response message subject.
- a first portion of the message e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content
- the second portion of the message includes a prompt indicating a response message subject.
- the system enhances device functionality by providing enhanced feedback to the user.
- This enhanced feedback makes the device more efficient by focusing the user on the appropriate time to respond and thus eliminating undetectable responses.
- these features improve humanmachine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable headmounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
- the first electronic device receives, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device.
- the motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device includes at least one or more rotation rates corresponding to the second electronic device and at least one or more acceleration rates corresponding to the second electronic device.
- the first electronic device while causing continuous audible sound to be provided at the second electronic device, causes a plurality of audible tones to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein a volume associated with the plurality of audible tones increases as each audible tone of the plurality of audible tones is provided.
- at least one tone is provided at the second electronic device, and in response to the at least one tone being provided at the second electronic device, the receiving of motion data from the second electronic device is initiated.
- the system enhances device functionality by informing the user that a gesture is presently being detected.
- This enhanced feedback makes the device more efficient by providing user training on new device functions and thus eliminating more conventional methods of interaction.
- these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
- the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a gesture based on the motion data.
- determining the gesture based on the motion data includes obtaining a motion classification probability based on the motion data, and in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the motion classification probability exceeds a motion classification probability threshold, determining the gesture based on a respective motion classification.
- the first electronic device in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture satisfies a predetermined gesture criteria, the first electronic device ceases to provide the continuous audible sound at the second electronic device prior to the end of the predetermined period of time, and after ceasing to provide the continuous audible sound, the first electronic device provides a confirmatory audible tone based on the gesture.
- a determination e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process
- the first electronic device in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture does not satisfy a predetermined gesture criteria, continues to provide the continuous audible sound at the second electronic device, wherein the continuous audible sound is provided for a predetermined period of time, and continues to receive the motion data from the second electronic device.
- a determination e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process
- the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a first partial gesture based on the motion data, and in response to a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the first partial gesture satisfies a first predetermined partial gesture criteria, causes a first audible tone to be provided at the second electronic device.
- the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a second partial gesture based on the motion data, and in response to a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the second partial gesture satisfies a second predetermined partial gesture criteria, a second audible tone is provided at the second electronic device.
- a response message is transmitted to the sender of the incoming text message, wherein the response message (e.g., automatically-generated text content and or generative text content) is generated (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) based on the response message subject, and in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to a rejection gesture, a response message (e.g., automatically- generated text content and or generative text content) is not transmitted to the sender of the incoming text message.
- a determination e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process
- the system By ceasing providing the continuous audible sound once a gesture is detected, the system enhances device functionality by minimizing unnecessary processing time on-device. This feature makes the device efficient by conserving device processing resources. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
- the first electronic device causes a first output to be provided at the second electronic device based on the gesture.
- the first electronic device in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to an acceptance gesture, the first electronic device causes an acceptance tone to be provided as the first output at the second electronic device.
- the first electronic device corresponds to one of a smartphone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, and a laptop computer
- the second electronic device corresponds to one of a headphone device and an earbud device.
- the system enhances device functionality by informing the user that a gesture has in fact been determined and will be acted upon.
- This enhanced feedback makes the device more efficient by informing the user of the steps required to complete a gesture-based response.
- these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
- the first electronic device performs a first task associated with the event alert.
- the first electronic device in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to a rejection gesture, the first electronic device causes a rejection tone to be provided as the first output at the second electronic device, wherein performing the first task includes ceasing to receive the motion data.
- performing a first task associated with the event alert comprises one of connecting an incoming audio call to the second electronic device and providing an audible message at the second electronic device.
- performing a first task associated with the event alert includes receiving, from the second electronic device, a speech input from a user, and transmitting a text message based on the received speech input.
- performing a first task associated with the event alert includes providing an audible output containing the contents of the incoming text message, wherein the subject of the incoming text message is generated (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) based on the contents of the incoming text message.
- the system enhances device functionality by increasing methods available to interact with a primary device. Increasing the options available to a user makes the device more efficient by reducing the need to use more cumbersome or traditional input methods. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
- the first electronic device detects an event alert.
- the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message
- the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert corresponds to an indication that the incoming text message exceeds a threshold character length.
- the event alert corresponds to a reminder
- the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert corresponds to an indication that the reminder includes a plurality of items exceeds an item threshold.
- the first electronic device causes a message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert.
- a message e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content
- an informational prompt is provided indicating that the providing of the message at the second electronic device may be aborted based on a respective gesture using the second electronic device.
- the first electronic device corresponds to one of a smartphone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, and a laptop computer and the second electronic device corresponds to one of a headphone device and an earbud device.
- the system enhances device functionality by providing the user with additional options to cancel device functions. Allowing the user to cancel device functions with gesture-based inputs makes the device more efficient avoiding unwanted tasks such as message read-outs. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
- the first electronic device receives, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device.
- the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a first partial gesture based on the motion data, and in response to a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the first partial gesture satisfies a first predetermined partial gesture criteria, the first electronic device causes a first audible tone to be provided at the second electronic device.
- the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a second partial gesture based on the motion data, and in response to a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the second partial gesture satisfies a second predetermined partial gesture criteria, a second audible tone is provided at the second electronic device.
- a determination e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process
- motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device is received, wherein the motion data is received until the message ceases to be provided at the second electronic device.
- the system enhances device functionality by informing the user that a gesture has in fact been determined and will be acted upon.
- This enhanced feedback makes the device more efficient by informing the user of the steps required to complete a gesture-based response.
- these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
- the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a gesture based on the motion data.
- determining (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) the gesture based on the motion data includes obtaining a motion classification probability based on the motion data, and in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the motion classification probability exceeds a motion classification probability threshold, the gesture is determined (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) based on a respective motion classification.
- the motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device includes at least one or more rotation rates corresponding to the second electronic device and at least one or more acceleration rates corresponding to the second electronic device.
- the first electronic device in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the message provided at the second electronic device is associated with a plurality of predetermined responses and a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to a rejection gesture, the first electronic device causes a rejection tone to be provided at the second electronic device, and ceases to receive the motion data.
- the first electronic device in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the message provided at the second electronic device is associated with a plurality of predetermined responses and a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to an acceptance gesture, the first electronic device causes an acceptance tone to be provided at the second electronic device, and ceases to receive the motion data.
- the message includes one or more words corresponding to an interrogatory
- the plurality of predetermined responses include an acceptance of the interrogatory and a rejection of the interrogatory.
- the first electronic device in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that a predetermined criteria is satisfied, the first electronic device ceases to provide the message at the second electronic device.
- the first electronic device in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture satisfies the predetermined criteria, the first electronic device causes an audible tone to be provided concurrently with ceasing to provide the message at the second electronic device.
- the determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture satisfies the predetermined criteria includes, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the message provided at the second electronic device is associated with a plurality of predetermined responses, determination is made (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gestures does not satisfy the predetermined criteria.
- the first electronic device continues to provide the message at the second electronic device.
- the first electronic device in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture does not satisfy the predetermined criteria, continues to receive, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device, and continues to determine the gesture based on the motion data.
- a determination e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process
- the system enhances device functionality by minimizing unnecessary processing time on-device. This feature makes the device efficient by conserving device processing resources.
- these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
- FIGS. 10-11 The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 10-11 are optionally implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1-4A, 6A-6B, and 7A-7C.
- the operations of process 900 may be implemented by one or more of operating system 718, applications module 724, I/O processing module 728, STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732, vocabulary index 744, task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738, media service(s) 120-1, or processor(s) 220, 410, and 704. It would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes are implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1-4A, 6A-6B, and 7A-7C.
- a computer-readable storage medium e.g., a non-transitory computer readable storage medium
- the computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods or processes described herein.
- an electronic device e.g., a portable electronic device
- an electronic device e.g., a portable electronic device
- a processing unit configured to perform any of the methods or processes described herein.
- an electronic device e.g., a portable electronic device
- Some embodiments described herein can include use of artificial intelligence and/or machine learning systems (sometimes referred to herein as the AI/ML systems).
- the use can include collecting, processing, labeling, organizing, analyzing, recommending and/or generating data. Entities that collect, share, and/or otherwise utilize user data should provide transparency and/or obtain user consent when collecting such data.
- the present disclosure recognizes that the use of the data in the AI/ML systems can be used to benefit users.
- the data can be used to train models that can be deployed to improve performance, accuracy, and/or functionality of applications and/or services.
- the use of the data enables the AI/ML systems to adapt and/or optimize operations to provide more personalized, efficient, and/or enhanced user experiences.
- Such adaptation and/or optimization can include tailoring content, recommendations, and/or interactions to individual users, as well as streamlining processes, and/or enabling more intuitive interfaces. Further beneficial uses of the data in the AI/ML systems are also contemplated by the present disclosure.
- data used by AI/ML systems includes publicly available data.
- data may be anonymized, aggregated, and/or otherwise processed to remove or to the degree possible limit any individual identification.
- entities that collect, share, and/or otherwise utilize such data should obtain user consent prior to and/or provide transparency when collecting such data.
- the present disclosure contemplates that the entities responsible for the use of data, including, but not limited to data used in association with AI/ML systems, should attempt to comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices.
- such entities may implement and consistently follow policies and practices recognized as meeting or exceeding industry standards and regulatory requirements for developing and/or training AI/ML systems. In doing so, attempts should be made to ensure all intellectual property rights and privacy considerations are maintained. Training should include practices safeguarding training data, such as personal information, through sufficient protections against misuse or exploitation. Such policies and practices should cover all stages of the AI/ML systems development, training, and use, including data collection, data preparation, model training, model evaluation, model deployment, and ongoing monitoring and maintenance. Transparency and accountability should be maintained throughout. Such policies should be easily accessible by users and should be updated as the collection and/or use of data changes. User data should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses.
- policies and/or practices should be adapted to the particular type of data being collected and/or accessed and tailored to a specific use case and applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations.
- AI/ML systems may utilize models that may be trained (e.g., supervised learning or unsupervised learning) using various training data, including data collected using a user device.
- Such use of user-collected data may be limited to operations on the user device.
- the training of the model can be done locally on the user device so no part of the data is sent to another device.
- the training of the model can be performed using one or more other devices (e.g., server(s)) in addition to the user device but done in a privacy preserving manner, e.g., via multi-party computation as may be done cryptographically by secret sharing data or other means so that the user data is not leaked to the other devices.
- the trained model can be centrally stored on the user device or stored on multiple devices, e.g., as in federated learning.
- Such decentralized storage can similarly be done in a privacy preserving manner, e.g., via cryptographic operations where each piece of data is broken into shards such that no device alone (i.e., only collectively with another device(s)) or only the user device can reassemble or use the data.
- a pattern of behavior of the user or the device may not be leaked, while taking advantage of increased computational resources of the other devices to train and execute the ML model. Accordingly, user-collected data can be protected.
- data from multiple devices can be combined in a privacy-preserving manner to train an ML model.
- the present disclosure contemplates that data used for AI/ML systems may be kept strictly separated from platforms where the AI/ML systems are deployed and/or used to interact with users and/or process data.
- data used for offline training of the AI/ML systems may be maintained in secured datastores with restricted access and/or not be retained beyond the duration necessary for training purposes.
- the AI/ML systems may utilize a local memory cache to store data temporarily during a user session.
- the local memory cache may be used to improve performance of the AI/ML systems.
- data stored in the local memory cache may be erased after the user session is completed. Any temporary caches of data used for online learning or inference may be promptly erased after processing. All data collection, transfer, and/or storage should use industry-standard encryption and/or secure communication.
- techniques such as federated learning, differential privacy, secure hardware components, homomorphic encryption, and/or multiparty computation among other techniques may be utilized to further protect personal information data during training and/or use of the AI/ML systems.
- the AI/ML systems should be monitored for changes in underlying data distribution such as concept drift or data skew that can degrade performance of the AI/ML systems over time.
- the AI/ML systems are trained using a combination of offline and online training.
- Offline training can use curated datasets to establish baseline model performance, while online training can allow the AI/ML systems to continually adapt and/or improve.
- online training can allow the AI/ML systems to continually adapt and/or improve.
- the present disclosure recognizes the importance of maintaining strict data governance practices throughout this process to ensure user privacy is protected.
- the AI/ML systems may be designed with safeguards to maintain adherence to originally intended purposes, even as the AI/ML systems adapt based on new data. Any significant changes in data collection and/or applications of an AI/ML system use may (and in some cases should) be transparently communicated to affected stakeholders and/or include obtaining user consent with respect to changes in how user data is collected and/or utilized.
- the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively restrict and/or block the use of and/or access to data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to data.
- the present technology should be configured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” of participation in the collection of data during registration for services or anytime thereafter.
- the present technology should be configured to allow users to select not to provide certain data for training the AI/ML systems and/or for use as input during the inference stage of such systems.
- the present technology should be configured to allow users to be able to select to limit the length of time data is maintained or entirely prohibit the use of their data for use by the AI/ML systems.
- the present disclosure contemplates providing notifications relating to the access or use of personal information. For instance, a user can be notified when their data is being input into the AI/ML systems for training or inference purposes, and/or reminded when the AI/ML systems generate outputs or make decisions based on their data.
- AI/ML systems should incorporate explicit restrictions and/or oversight to mitigate against risks that may be present even when such systems having been designed, developed, and/or operated according to industry best practices and standards. For example, outputs may be produced that could be considered erroneous, harmful, offensive, and/or biased; such outputs may not necessarily reflect the opinions or positions of the entities developing or deploying these systems. Furthermore, in some cases, references to third-party products and/or services in the outputs should not be construed as endorsements or affiliations by the entities providing the AI/ML systems. Generated content can be filtered for potentially inappropriate or dangerous material prior to being presented to users, while human oversight and/or ability to override or correct erroneous or undesirable outputs can be maintained as a failsafe.
- the present disclosure further contemplates that users of the AI/ML systems should refrain from using the services in any manner that infringes upon, misappropriates, or violates the rights of any party.
- the AI/ML systems should not be used for any unlawful or illegal activity, nor to develop any application or use case that would commit or facilitate the commission of a crime, or other tortious, unlawful, or illegal act.
- the AI/ML systems should not violate, misappropriate, or infringe any copyrights, trademarks, rights of privacy and publicity, trade secrets, patents, or other proprietary or legal rights of any party, and appropriately attribute content as required.
- the AI/ML systems should not interfere with any security, digital signing, digital rights management, content protection, verification, or authentication mechanisms.
- this gathered data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person.
- personal information data can include demographic data, locationbased data, telephone numbers, email addresses, twitter IDs, home addresses, data or records relating to a user’s health or level of fitness (e.g., vital signs measurements, medication information, exercise information), date of birth, or any other identifying or personal information.
- the present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data, in the present technology, can be used to the benefit of users.
- the personal information such as a contact information can be used for commands using secondary device gestures.
- other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present disclosure.
- health and fitness data may be used to provide insights into a user’s general wellness, or may be used as positive feedback to individuals using technology to pursue wellness goals.
- the present disclosure contemplates that the entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices.
- such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining personal information data private and secure.
- Such policies should be easily accessible by users, and should be updated as the collection and/or use of data changes.
- Personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection/sharing should occur after receiving the informed consent of the users.
- policies and practices should be adapted for the particular types of personal information data being collected and/or accessed and adapted to applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations. For instance, in the US, collection of or access to certain health data may be governed by federal and/or state laws, such as the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); whereas health data in other countries may be subject to other regulations and policies and should be handled accordingly. Hence different privacy practices should be maintained for different personal data types in each country.
- HIPAA Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
- the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data.
- the present technology can be configured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” of participation in the collection of personal information data during registration for services or anytime thereafter.
- users can select not to provide gesture-based information.
- users can select to limit detail provided with respect to gesture information, device messages, and the like.
- the present disclosure contemplates providing notifications relating to the access or use of personal information. For instance, a user may be notified upon downloading an app that their personal information data will be accessed and then reminded again just before personal information data is accessed by the app.
- personal information data should be managed and handled in a way to minimize risks of unintentional or unauthorized access or use. Risk can be minimized by limiting the collection of data and deleting data once it is no longer needed.
- data de-identification can be used to protect a user’s privacy. Deidentification may be facilitated, when appropriate, by removing specific identifiers (e.g., date of birth, etc.), controlling the amount or specificity of data stored (e.g., collecting location data at a city level rather than at an address level), controlling how data is stored (e.g., aggregating data across users), and/or other methods.
- the present disclosure broadly covers use of personal information data to implement one or more various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the various embodiments can also be implemented without the need for accessing such personal information data. That is, the various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or a portion of such personal information data. For example, for commands using secondary device gestures may be accomplished on non-personal information data or a bare minimum amount of personal information, such as anonymized gesture information, other non-personal information available to the gesture tracking system, or publicly available information.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Telephone Function (AREA)
Abstract
Systems and processes for commands using secondary device gestures are provided. In some embodiments, a method includes a first electronic detecting an event alert and causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert. In some embodiments, the method includes the first electronic device receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device and determining a gesture based on the motion data. In some embodiments, the method includes the first electronic device causing a first output to be provided at the second electronic device based on the gesture, and performing a first task associated with the event alert.
Description
REPLYING TO EVENTS ON A FIRST DEVICE BY COMMANDS USING SECONDARY DEVICE GESTURES
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims priority to U.S. Patent Application No. 18/893,818, entitled “COMMANDS USING SECONDARY DEVICE GESTURES,” filed September 23, 2024, to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/670,578, entitled “COMMANDS USING SECONDARY DEVICE GESTURES,” filed July 12, 2024, to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/657,828, entitled, “COMMANDS USING SECONDARY DEVICE GESTURES”, filed on June 8, 2024, and to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/541,604, entitled, “COMMANDS USING SECONDARY DEVICE GESTURES,” filed on September 29, 2023. The contents of each of these applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
FIELD
[0002] This application relates generally to detecting gestures, and in particular, to commands using secondary device gestures.
BACKGROUND
[0003] Electronic devices are used to perform a wide variety of tasks. In some cases, a user may interchangeably use multiple electronic devices. For example, the user may utilize a smartphone connected to wireless headphones in order to listen to music, send and receive messages, make telephone calls, and the like. Event alerts may also be received at the smartphone such that corresponding information is delivered to the headphones. However, conventional systems do not provide a robust framework to permit users to perform actions using the wireless headphones. For example, traditional systems typically do not allow a user to perform head gestures in order to respond affirmatively or negatively to a respective message. In addition, such systems are not well equipped to quickly cancel audible prompts as long message read-outs. Accordingly, an improved system for commands using secondary device gestures is desired.
SUMMARY
[0004] Systems and processes for commands using secondary device gestures are provided. In some embodiments, a method includes a first electronic detecting an event alert and causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert. In some embodiments, the method includes the first electronic device receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device and determining a gesture based on the motion data. In some embodiments, the method includes the first electronic device causing a first output to be provided at the second electronic device based on the gesture, and performing a first task associated with the event alert.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0005] FIG. l is a block diagram illustrating a system and environment for implementing a digital assistant, according to various examples.
[0006] FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant, according to various examples.
[0007] FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling, according to various examples.
[0008] FIG. 3 illustrates a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant, according to various examples.
[0009] FIG. 4A is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, according to various examples.
[0010] FIGS. 4B-4G illustrate the use of Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) to perform operations.
[0011] FIG. 5 A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device, according to various examples.
[0012] FIG. 5B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch- sensitive surface that is separate from the display, according to various examples.
[0013] FIG. 6A illustrates a personal electronic device, according to various examples.
[0014] FIG. 6B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device, according to various examples.
[0015] FIG. 7A is a block diagram illustrating a digital assistant system or a server portion thereof, according to various examples.
[0016] FIG. 7B illustrates the functions of the digital assistant shown in FIG. 7A, according to various examples.
[0017] FIG. 7C illustrates a portion of an ontology, according to various examples.
[0018] FIGS. 8A-8F illustrate a system for commands using secondary device gestures, according to various examples.
[0019] FIGS. 9A-9C illustrate a system for commands using secondary device gestures, according to various examples.
[0020] FIG. 10 illustrates a process for commands using secondary device gestures, according to various examples.
[0021] FIG. 11 illustrates a process for commands using secondary device gestures, according to various examples.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0022] In the following description of examples, reference is made to the accompanying drawings in which are shown by way of illustration specific examples that can be practiced. It is to be understood that other examples can be used and structural changes can be made without departing from the scope of the various examples.
[0023] In general, conventional systems related to gesture-based commands do not offer users a robust framework to facilitate device interaction. In particular, systems involving two devices do not provide an efficient mechanism by which to perform commands on a first device, such as a smartphone, using a coupled wearable device, such as headphones. Such systems may simply read out a message or notification to a user without providing an option to enter affirmative or negative response to a question within the message or query additional
content about the notification content. In addition, these systems do not provide an efficient mechanism by which to cancel the read-out of a message which is currently being provided at a device. Accordingly, an improved system for contextual response suggestions is desired.
[0024] Although the following description uses terms “first,” “second,” etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first input could be termed a second input, and, similarly, a second input could be termed a first input, without departing from the scope of the various described examples. The first input and the second input are both inputs and, in some cases, are separate and different inputs.
[0025] The terminology used in the description of the various described examples herein is for the purpose of describing particular examples only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described examples and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.
[0026] The term “if’ may be construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” may be construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.
1. System and Environment
[0027] FIG. 1 illustrates a block diagram of system 100 according to various examples. In some examples, system 100 implements a digital assistant. The terms “digital assistant,” “virtual assistant,” “intelligent automated assistant,” or “automatic digital assistant” refer to any information processing system that interprets natural language input in spoken and/or
textual form to infer user intent, and performs actions based on the inferred user intent. For example, to act on an inferred user intent, the system performs one or more of the following: identifying a task flow with steps and parameters designed to accomplish the inferred user intent, inputting specific requirements from the inferred user intent into the task flow; executing the task flow by invoking programs, methods, services, APIs, or the like; and generating output responses to the user in an audible (e.g., speech) and/or visual form.
[0028] Specifically, a digital assistant is capable of accepting a user request at least partially in the form of a natural language command, request, statement, narrative, and/or inquiry. Typically, the user request seeks either an informational answer or performance of a task by the digital assistant. A satisfactory response to the user request includes a provision of the requested informational answer, a performance of the requested task, or a combination of the two. For example, a user asks the digital assistant a question, such as “Where am I right now?” Based on the user’s current location, the digital assistant answers, “You are in Central Park near the west gate.” The user also requests the performance of a task, for example, “Please invite my friends to my girlfriend’s birthday party next week.” In response, the digital assistant can acknowledge the request by saying “Yes, right away,” and then send a suitable calendar invite on behalf of the user to each of the user’s friends listed in the user’s electronic address book. During performance of a requested task, the digital assistant sometimes interacts with the user in a continuous dialogue involving multiple exchanges of information over an extended period of time. There are numerous other ways of interacting with a digital assistant to request information or performance of various tasks. In addition to providing verbal responses and taking programmed actions, the digital assistant also provides responses in other visual or audio forms, e.g., as text, alerts, music, videos, animations, etc.
[0029] As shown in FIG. 1, in some examples, a digital assistant is implemented according to a client-server model. The digital assistant includes client-side portion 102 (hereafter “DA client 102”) executed on user device 104 and server-side portion 106 (hereafter “DA server 106”) executed on server system 108. DA client 102 communicates with DA server 106 through one or more networks 110. DA client 102 provides client-side functionalities such as user-facing input and output processing and communication with DA server 106. DA server 106 provides server-side functionalities for any number of DA clients 102 each residing on a respective user device 104.
[0030] In some examples, DA server 106 includes client-facing I/O interface 112, one or more processing modules 114, data and models 116, and I/O interface to external services 118. The client-facing I/O interface 112 facilitates the client-facing input and output processing for DA server 106. One or more processing modules 114 utilize data and models 116 to process speech input and determine the user’s intent based on natural language input. Further, one or more processing modules 114 perform task execution based on inferred user intent. In some examples, DA server 106 communicates with external services 120 through network(s) 110 for task completion or information acquisition. I/O interface to external services 118 facilitates such communications.
[0031] User device 104 can be any suitable electronic device. In some examples, user device 104 is a portable multifunctional device (e.g., device 200, described below with reference to FIG. 2A), a multifunctional device (e.g., device 400, described below with reference to FIG. 4A), or a personal electronic device (e.g., device 600, described below with reference to FIGS. 6A-6B.) A portable multifunctional device is, for example, a mobile telephone that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Specific examples of portable multifunction devices include the Apple Watch®, iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other examples of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, earphones/headphones, speakers, and laptop or tablet computers. Further, in some examples, user device 104 is a non-portable multifunctional device. In particular, user device 104 is a desktop computer, a game console, a speaker, a television, or a television set-top box. In some examples, user device 104 includes a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads). Further, user device 104 optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick. Various examples of electronic devices, such as multifunctional devices, are described below in greater detail.
[0032] Examples of communication network(s) 110 include local area networks (LAN) and wide area networks (WAN), e.g., the Internet. Communication network(s) 110 is implemented using any known network protocol, including various wired or wireless protocols, such as, for example, Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth,
Wi-Fi, voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol.
[0033] Server system 108 is implemented on one or more standalone data processing apparatus or a distributed network of computers. In some examples, server system 108 also employs various virtual devices and/or services of third-party service providers (e.g., third- party cloud service providers) to provide the underlying computing resources and/or infrastructure resources of server system 108.
[0034] In some examples, user device 104 communicates with DA server 106 via second user device 122. Second user device 122 is similar or identical to user device 104. For example, second user device 122 is similar to devices 200, 400, or 600 described below with reference to FIGS. 2A, 4A, and 6A-6B. User device 104 is configured to communicatively couple to second user device 122 via a direct communication connection, such as Bluetooth, NFC, BTLE, or the like, or via a wired or wireless network, such as a local Wi-Fi network. In some examples, second user device 122 is configured to act as a proxy between user device 104 and DA server 106. For example, DA client 102 of user device 104 is configured to transmit information (e.g., a user request received at user device 104) to DA server 106 via second user device 122. DA server 106 processes the information and returns relevant data (e.g., data content responsive to the user request) to user device 104 via second user device 122.
[0035] In some examples, user device 104 is configured to communicate abbreviated requests for data to second user device 122 to reduce the amount of information transmitted from user device 104. Second user device 122 is configured to determine supplemental information to add to the abbreviated request to generate a complete request to transmit to DA server 106. This system architecture can advantageously allow user device 104 having limited communication capabilities and/or limited battery power (e.g., a watch or a similar compact electronic device) to access services provided by DA server 106 by using second user device 122, having greater communication capabilities and/or battery power (e.g., a mobile phone, laptop computer, tablet computer, or the like), as a proxy to DA server 106. While only two user devices 104 and 122 are shown in FIG. 1, it should be appreciated that system 100, in some examples, includes any number and type of user devices configured in this proxy configuration to communicate with DA server system 106.
[0036] Although the digital assistant shown in FIG. 1 includes both a client-side portion (e.g., DA client 102) and a server-side portion (e.g., DA server 106), in some examples, the functions of a digital assistant are implemented as a standalone application installed on a user device. In addition, the divisions of functionalities between the client and server portions of the digital assistant can vary in different implementations. For instance, in some examples, the DA client is a thin-client that provides only user-facing input and output processing functions, and delegates all other functionalities of the digital assistant to a backend server.
2. Electronic Devices
[0037] Attention is now directed toward embodiments of electronic devices for implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 200 with touch-sensitive display system 212 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 212 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a “touch-sensitive display system.” Device 200 includes memory 202 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller 222, one or more processing units (CPUs) 220, peripherals interface 218, RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, input/output (I/O) subsystem 206, other input control devices 216, and external port 224. Device 200 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 264. Device 200 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 200 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200). Device 200 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs on device 200 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch- sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200 or touchpad 455 of device 400). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 203.
[0038] As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch- sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For
example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressuresensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch- sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch- sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch- sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button).
[0039] As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user’s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user’s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch- sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as
an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user’s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.
[0040] It should be appreciated that device 200 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 200 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG. 2A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits.
[0041] Memory 202 includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums. The computer-readable storage mediums are, for example, tangible and non-transitory. Memory 202 includes high-speed random access memory and also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller 222 controls access to memory 202 by other components of device 200.
[0042] In some examples, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 202 is used to store instructions (e.g., for performing aspects of processes described below) for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processor-containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions. In other examples, the instructions (e.g., for performing aspects of the processes described below) are stored on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium (not shown) of the server system 108 or are divided between the non-transitory computer-readable
storage medium of memory 202 and the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of server system 108.
[0043] Peripherals interface 218 is used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 220 and memory 202. The one or more processors 220 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 202 to perform various functions for device 200 and to process data. In some embodiments, peripherals interface 218, CPU 220, and memory controller 222 are implemented on a single chip, such as chip 204. In some other embodiments, they are implemented on separate chips.
[0044] RF (radio frequency) circuitry 208 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 208 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry 208 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802. I la, IEEE 802.1 lb, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.1 In, and/or IEEE 802.1 lac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging
and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document.
[0045] Audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, and microphone 213 provide an audio interface between a user and device 200. Audio circuitry 210 receives audio data from peripherals interface 218, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 211. Speaker 211 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 210 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 213 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 210 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 218 for processing. Audio data are retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 202 and/or RF circuitry 208 by peripherals interface 218. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 210 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 312, FIG. 3). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 210 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).
[0046] I/O subsystem 206 couples input/output peripherals on device 200, such as touch screen 212 and other input control devices 216, to peripherals interface 218. I/O subsystem 206 optionally includes display controller 256, optical sensor controller 258, intensity sensor controller 259, haptic feedback controller 261, and one or more input controllers 260 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 260 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 216. The other input control devices 216 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controlled s) 260 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 308, FIG. 3) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 211 and/or microphone 213. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 306, FIG. 3).
[0047] A quick press of the push button disengages a lock of touch screen 212 or begin a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. Patent Application 11/322,549, “Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock
Image,” filed December 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No. 7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. A longer press of the push button (e.g., 306) turns power to device 200 on or off. The user is able to customize a functionality of one or more of the buttons. Touch screen 212 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.
[0048] Touch-sensitive display 212 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 256 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 212. Touch screen 212 displays visual output to the user. The visual output includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output correspond to userinterface objects.
[0049] Touch screen 212 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 202) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 212 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 212. In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch screen 212 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user.
[0050] Touch screen 212 uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies may be used in other embodiments. Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 212. In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.
[0051] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 is analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Patents: 6,323,846
(Westerman et al.), 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. However, touch screen 212 displays visual output from device 200, whereas touch- sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.
[0052] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 is as described in the following applications: (1) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/381,313, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/903,964, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed July 30, 2004; (4) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/048,264, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed January 31, 2005; (5) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/038,590, “Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed January 18, 2005; (6) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,758, “Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface,” filed September 16, 2005; (7) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,700, “Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface,” filed September 16, 2005; (8) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,737, “Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual Keyboard,” filed September 16, 2005; and (9) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/367,749, “Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device,” filed March 3, 2006. All of these applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
[0053] Touch screen 212 has, for example, a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user makes contact with touch screen 212 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.
[0054] In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 200 includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is a touch-sensitive surface that is
separate from touch screen 212 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.
[0055] Device 200 also includes power system 262 for powering the various components. Power system 262 includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.
[0056] Device 200 also includes one or more optical sensors 264. FIG. 2A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 258 in EO subsystem 206. Optical sensor 264 includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal -oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor 264 receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 243 (also called a camera module), optical sensor 264 captures still images or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is used as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user’s image is obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, the position of optical sensor 264 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 264 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition.
[0057] Device 200 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265. FIG. 2A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 259 in EO subsystem 206. Contact intensity sensor 265 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor 265 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface
(e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200.
[0058] Device 200 also includes one or more proximity sensors 266. FIG. 2A shows proximity sensor 266 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, proximity sensor 266 is coupled to input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206. Proximity sensor 266 is performed as described in U.S. Patent Application Nos. 11/241,839, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; 11/240,788, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; 11/620,702, “Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output”; 11/586,862, “Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices”; and 11/638,251, “Methods And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals,” which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 212 when the multifunction device is placed near the user’s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).
[0059] Device 200 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 267. FIG. 2A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 261 in I/O subsystem 206. Tactile output generator 267 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Contact intensity sensor 265 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 233 and generates tactile outputs on device 200 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 200. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 200) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 200). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200.
[0060] Device 200 also includes one or more accelerometers 268. FIG. 2A shows accelerometer 268 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, accelerometer 268 is
coupled to an input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206. Accelerometer 268 performs, for example, as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, “Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices,” and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, “Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,” both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device 200 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 268, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 200.
[0061] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 202 include operating system 226, communication module (or set of instructions) 228, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 230, graphics module (or set of instructions) 232, text input module (or set of instructions) 234, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 235, Digital Assistant Client Module 229, and applications (or sets of instructions) 236. Further, memory 202 stores data and models, such as user data and models 231. Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 202 (FIG. 2A) or 470 (FIG. 4A) stores device/global internal state 257, as shown in FIGS. 2A and 4A. Device/global internal state 257 includes one or more of active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 212; sensor state, including information obtained from the device’s various sensors and input control devices 216; and location information concerning the device’s location and/or attitude.
[0062] Operating system 226 (e.g, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g, memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.
[0063] Communication module 228 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 224 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 208 and/or external port 224. External port 224 (e.g. Universal
Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.
[0064] Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects contact with touch screen 212 (in conjunction with display controller 256) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 230 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module 230 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 230 and display controller 256 detect contact on a touchpad.
[0065] In some embodiments, contact/motion module 230 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 200). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter).
[0066] Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.
[0067] Graphics module 232 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 212 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including , without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.
[0068] In some embodiments, graphics module 232 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 232 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 256.
[0069] Haptic feedback module 233 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 267 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 200 in response to user interactions with device 200.
[0070] Text input module 234, which is, in some examples, a component of graphics module 232, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 237, email 240, IM 241, browser 247, and any other application that needs text input).
[0071] GPS module 235 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 238 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 243 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location-
based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
[0072] Digital assistant client module 229 includes various client-side digital assistant instructions to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant. For example, digital assistant client module 229 is capable of accepting voice input (e.g., speech input), text input, touch input, and/or gestural input through various user interfaces (e.g., microphone 213, accelerometer(s) 268, touch-sensitive display system 212, optical sensor(s) 264, other input control devices 216, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200. Digital assistant client module 229 is also capable of providing output in audio (e.g., speech output), visual, and/or tactile forms through various output interfaces (e.g., speaker 211, touch-sensitive display system 212, tactile output generator(s) 267, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200. For example, output is provided as voice, sound, alerts, text messages, menus, graphics, videos, animations, vibrations, and/or combinations of two or more of the above. During operation, digital assistant client module 229 communicates with DA server 106 using RF circuitry 208.
[0073] User data and models 231 include various data associated with the user (e.g., userspecific vocabulary data, user preference data, user-specified name pronunciations, data from the user’s electronic address book, to-do lists, shopping lists, etc.) to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant. Further, user data and models 231 include various models (e.g., speech recognition models, statistical language models, natural language processing models, ontology, task flow models, service models, etc.) for processing user input and determining user intent.
[0074] In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 utilizes the various sensors, subsystems, and peripheral devices of portable multifunction device 200 to gather additional information from the surrounding environment of the portable multifunction device 200 to establish a context associated with a user, the current user interaction, and/or the current user input. In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 provides the contextual information or a subset thereof with the user input to DA server 106 to help infer the user’s intent. In some examples, the digital assistant also uses the contextual information to determine how to prepare and deliver outputs to the user. Contextual information is referred to as context data.
[0075] In some examples, the contextual information that accompanies the user input includes sensor information, e.g., lighting, ambient noise, ambient temperature, images or videos of the surrounding environment, etc. In some examples, the contextual information can also include the physical state of the device, e.g., device orientation, device location, device temperature, power level, speed, acceleration, motion patterns, cellular signals strength, etc. In some examples, information related to the software state of DA server 106, e.g., running processes, installed programs, past and present network activities, background services, error logs, resources usage, etc., and of portable multifunction device 200 is provided to DA server 106 as contextual information associated with a user input.
[0076] In some examples, the digital assistant client module 229 selectively provides information (e.g., user data 231) stored on the portable multifunction device 200 in response to requests from DA server 106. In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 also elicits additional input from the user via a natural language dialogue or other user interfaces upon request by DA server 106. Digital assistant client module 229 passes the additional input to DA server 106 to help DA server 106 in intent deduction and/or fulfillment of the user’s intent expressed in the user request.
[0077] A more detailed description of a digital assistant is described below with reference to FIGS. 7A-7C. It should be recognized that digital assistant client module 229 can include any number of the sub-modules of digital assistant module 726 described below.
[0078] Applications 236 include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:
• Contacts module 237 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);
• Telephone module 238;
• Video conference module 239;
• E-mail client module 240;
• Instant messaging (IM) module 241;
Workout support module 242;
Camera module 243 for still and/or video images;
• Image management module 244;
• Video player module;
• Music player module;
• Browser module 247;
• Calendar module 248;
• Widget modules 249, which includes, in some examples, one or more of: weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249- 4, dictionary widget 249-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user- created widgets 249-6;
• Widget creator module 250 for making user-created widgets 249-6;
• Search module 251 ;
• Video and music player module 252, which merges video player module and music player module;
• Notes module 253;
• Map module 254; and/or
• Online video module 255.
[0079] Examples of other applications 236 that are stored in memory 202 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.
[0080] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, contacts module 237 are used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 292 of contacts module 237 in memory 202 or memory 470), including: adding name(s) to the
address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e- mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 238, video conference module 239, e-mail 240, or IM 241; and so forth.
[0081] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, telephone module 238 are used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 237, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.
[0082] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, touch screen 212, display controller 256, optical sensor 264, optical sensor controller 258, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, contacts module 237, and telephone module 238, video conference module 239 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.
[0083] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, e-mail client module 240 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 244, e-mail client module 240 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 243.
[0084] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, the instant messaging module 241 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony -based instant messages or using
XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).
[0085] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, GPS module 235, map module 254, and music player module, workout support module 242 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data.
[0086] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, optical sensor(s) 264, optical sensor controller 258, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and image management module 244, camera module 243 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 202, modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 202.
[0087] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and camera module 243, image management module 244 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.
[0088] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, browser module 247 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.
[0089] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, e-mail client
module 240, and browser module 247, calendar module 248 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.
[0090] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and browser module 247, widget modules 249 are mini-applications that can be downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249-4, and dictionary widget 249-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 249-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).
[0091] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and browser module 247, the widget creator module 250 are used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).
[0092] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, search module 251 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 202 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.
[0093] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, RF circuitry 208, and browser module 247, video and music player module 252 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen 212 or on an external, connected display via external port 224). In some embodiments, device 200 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).
[0094] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, notes module 253 includes
executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.
[0095] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, GPS module 235, and browser module 247, map module 254 are used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.
[0096] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, RF circuitry 208, text input module 234, e-mail client module 240, and browser module 247, online video module 255 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 224), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 241, rather than e-mail client module 240, is used to send a link to a particular online video. Additional description of the online video application can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/936,562, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed June 20, 2007, and U.S. Patent Application No. 11/968,067, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed December 31, 2007, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
[0097] Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules can be combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. For example, video player module can be combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 252, FIG. 2A). In some embodiments, memory 202 stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified
above. Furthermore, memory 202 stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
[0098] In some embodiments, device 200 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 200, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 200 is reduced.
[0099] The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 200 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 200. In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.
[0100] FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 202 (FIG. 2A) or 470 (FIG. 4A) includes event sorter 270 (e.g., in operating system 226) and a respective application 236-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 237-251, 255, 480-490).
[0101] Event sorter 270 receives event information and determines the application 236-1 and application view 291 of application 236-1 to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter 270 includes event monitor 271 and event dispatcher module 274. In some embodiments, application 236-1 includes application internal state 292, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 212 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 257 is used by event sorter 270 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 292 is used by event sorter 270 to determine application views 291 to which to deliver event information.
[0102] In some embodiments, application internal state 292 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 236-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 236-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go
back to a prior state or view of application 236-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.
[0103] Event monitor 271 receives event information from peripherals interface 218. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch- sensitive display 212, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 218 transmits information it receives from VO subsystem 206 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 266, accelerometer(s) 268, and/or microphone 213 (through audio circuitry 210). Information that peripherals interface 218 receives from I/O subsystem 206 includes information from touch- sensitive display 212 or a touch-sensitive surface.
[0104] In some embodiments, event monitor 271 sends requests to the peripherals interface 218 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).
[0105] In some embodiments, event sorter 270 also includes a hit view determination module 272 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 273.
[0106] Hit view determination module 272 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 212 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.
[0107] Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs is determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.
[0108] Hit view determination module 272 receives information related to sub events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 272 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy
which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of subevents that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module 272, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.
[0109] Active event recognizer determination module 273 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.
[0110] Event dispatcher module 274 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 280). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 273, event dispatcher module 274 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 273. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 274 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 282.
[OHl] In some embodiments, operating system 226 includes event sorter 270. Alternatively, application 236-1 includes event sorter 270. In yet other embodiments, event sorter 270 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 202, such as contact/motion module 230.
[0112] In some embodiments, application 236-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 290 and one or more application views 291, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application’s user interface. Each application view 291 of the application 236-1 includes one or more event recognizers 280. Typically, a respective application view 291 includes a plurality of event recognizers 280. In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 280 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 236-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler 290
includes one or more of: data updater 276, object updater 277, GUI updater 278, and/or event data 279 received from event sorter 270. Event handler 290 utilizes or calls data updater 276, object updater 277, or GUI updater 278 to update the application internal state 292. Alternatively, one or more of the application views 291 include one or more respective event handlers 290. Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a respective application view 291.
[0113] A respective event recognizer 280 receives event information (e.g., event data 279) from event sorter 270 and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer 280 includes event receiver 282 and event comparator 284. In some embodiments, event recognizer 280 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 283, and event delivery instructions 288 (which include sub-event delivery instructions).
[0114] Event receiver 282 receives event information from event sorter 270. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.
[0115] Event comparator 284 compares the event information to predefined event or subevent definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 284 includes event definitions 286. Event definitions 286 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (287-1), event 2 (287- 2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event (287) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event 1 (287-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (287-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on
the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch- sensitive display 212, and liftoff of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 290.
[0116] In some embodiments, event definition 287 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 212, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 212, event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 290, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 290 should be activated. For example, event comparator 284 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.
[0117] In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event (287) also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer’s event type.
[0118] When a respective event recognizer 280 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 286, the respective event recognizer 280 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.
[0119] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 includes metadata 283 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.
[0120] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 activates event handler 290 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are
recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 290. Activating an event handler 290 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 280 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 290 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.
[0121] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 288 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.
[0122] In some embodiments, data updater 276 creates and updates data used in application 236-1. For example, data updater 276 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 237, or stores a video file used in video player module. In some embodiments, object updater 277 creates and updates objects used in application 236-1. For example, object updater 277 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater 278 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 278 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 232 for display on a touch- sensitive display.
[0123] In some embodiments, event handler(s) 290 includes or has access to data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278. In some embodiments, data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a single module of a respective application 236-1 or application view 291. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
[0124] It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 200 with input devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.
[0125] FIG. 3 illustrates a portable multifunction device 200 having a touch screen 212 in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 300. In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 302 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 303 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 200. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.
[0126] Device 200 also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 304. As described previously, menu button 304 is used to navigate to any application 236 in a set of applications that is executed on device 200. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 212.
[0127] In one embodiment, device 200 includes touch screen 212, menu button 304, push button 306 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 308, subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 310, headset jack 312, and docking/charging external port 224. Push button 306 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device 200 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 213. Device 200 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 212 and/or one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 200.
[0128] FIG. 4A is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 400 need not be
portable. In some embodiments, device 400 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child’s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 400 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 410, one or more network or other communications interfaces 460, memory 470, and one or more communication buses 420 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 420 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device 400 includes input/output (I/O) interface 430 comprising display 440, which is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface 430 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 450 and touchpad 455, tactile output generator 457 for generating tactile outputs on device 400 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 267 described above with reference to FIG. 2A), sensors 459 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 265 described above with reference to FIG. 2A). Memory 470 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes nonvolatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 470 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 410. In some embodiments, memory 470 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 470 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200. For example, memory 470 of device 400 optionally stores drawing module 480, presentation module 482, word processing module 484, website creation module 486, disk authoring module 488, and/or spreadsheet module 490, while memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A) optionally does not store these modules.
[0129] Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 4A is, in some examples, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above-identified modules or programs (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some
embodiments, memory 470 stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 470 stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
[0130] Implementations within the scope of the present disclosure can be partially or entirely realized using a tangible computer-readable storage medium (or multiple tangible computer-readable storage media of one or more types) encoding one or more computer- readable instructions. It should be recognized that computer-readable instructions can be organized in any format, including applications, widgets, processes, software, and/or components.
[0131] Implementations within the scope of the present disclosure include a computer- readable storage medium that encodes instructions organized as an application (e.g., application 3160) that, when executed by one or more processing units, control an electronic device (e.g., device 3150) to perform the method of FIG. 4B, the method of FIG. 4C, and/or one or more other processes and/or methods described herein.
[0132] It should be recognized that application 3160 (shown in FIG. 4D) can be any suitable type of application, including, for example, one or more of: a browser application, an application that functions as an execution environment for plug-ins, widgets or other applications, a fitness application, a health application, a digital payments application, a media application, a social network application, a messaging application, and/or a maps application. In some embodiments, application 3160 is an application that is pre-installed on device 3150 at purchase (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, application 3160 is an application that is provided to device 3150 via an operating system update file (e.g., a first-party application or a second-party application). In some embodiments, application 3160 is an application that is provided via an application store. In some embodiments, the application store can be an application store that is pre-installed on device 3150 at purchase (e.g., a first-party application store). In some embodiments, the application store is a third-party application store (e.g., an application store that is provided by another application store, downloaded via a network, and/or read from a storage device).
[0133] Referring to FIG. 4B and FIG. 4F, application 3160 obtains information (e.g., 3010). In some embodiments, at 3010, information is obtained from at least one hardware component of device 3150. In some embodiments, at 3010, information is obtained from at least one software module of device 3150. In some embodiments, at 3010, information is
obtained from at least one hardware component external to device 3150 (e.g., a peripheral device, an accessory device, and/or a server). In some embodiments, the information obtained at 3010 includes positional information, time information, notification information, user information, environment information, electronic device state information, weather information, media information, historical information, event information, hardware information, and/or motion information. In some embodiments, in response to and/or after obtaining the information at 3010, application 3160 provides the information to a system (e.g., 3020).
[0134] In some embodiments, the system (e.g., 3110 shown in FIG. 4E) is an operating system hosted on device 3150. In some embodiments, the system (e.g., 3110 shown in FIG. 4E) is an external device (e.g., a server, a peripheral device, an accessory, and/or a personal computing device) that includes an operating system.
[0135] Referring to FIG. 4C and FIG. 4G, application 3160 obtains information (e.g., 3030). In some embodiments, the information obtained at 3030 includes positional information, time information, notification information, user information, environment information electronic device state information, weather information, media information, historical information, event information, hardware information, and/or motion information. In response to and/or after obtaining the information at 3030, application 3160 performs an operation with the information (e.g., 3040). In some embodiments, the operation performed at 3040 includes: providing a notification based on the information, sending a message based on the information, displaying the information, controlling a user interface of a fitness application based on the information, controlling a user interface of a health application based on the information, controlling a focus mode based on the information, setting a reminder based on the information, adding a calendar entry based on the information, and/or calling an API of system 3110 based on the information.
[0136] In some embodiments, one or more steps of the method of FIG. 4B and/or the method of FIG. 4C is performed in response to a trigger. In some embodiments, the trigger includes detection of an event, a notification received from system 3110, a user input, and/or a response to a call to an API provided by system 3110.
[0137] In some embodiments, the instructions of application 3160, when executed, control device 3150 to perform the method of FIG. 4B and/or the method of FIG. 4C by calling an application programming interface (API) (e.g., API 3190) provided by system
3110. In some embodiments, application 3160 performs at least a portion of the method of FIG. 4B and/or the method of FIG. 4C without calling API 3190.
[0138] In some embodiments, one or more steps of the method of FIG. 4B and/or the method of FIG. 4C includes calling an API (e.g., API 3190) using one or more parameters defined by the API. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters include a constant, a key, a data structure, an object, an object class, a variable, a data type, a pointer, an array, a list or a pointer to a function or method, and/or another way to reference a data or other item to be passed via the API.
[0139] Referring to FIG. 4D, device 3150 is illustrated. In some embodiments, device 3150 is a personal computing device, a smart phone, a smart watch, a fitness tracker, a head mounted display (HMD) device, a media device, a communal device, a speaker, a television, and/or a tablet. As illustrated in FIG. 4D, device 3150 includes application 3160 and an operating system (e.g., system 3110 shown in FIG. 4E). Application 3160 includes application implementation module 3170 and API-calling module 3180. System 3110 includes API 3190 and implementation module 3100. It should be recognized that device 3150, application 3160, and/or system 3110 can include more, fewer, and/or different components than illustrated in FIGS. 4D and 4E.
[0140] In some embodiments, application implementation module 3170 includes a set of one or more instructions corresponding to one or more operations performed by application 3160. For example, when application 3160 is a messaging application, application implementation module 3170 can include operations to receive and send messages. In some embodiments, application implementation module 3170 communicates with API-calling module 3180 to communicate with system 3110 via API 3190 (shown in FIG. 4E).
[0141] In some embodiments, API 3190 is a software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that provides an interface that allows a different module (e.g., API-calling module 3180) to access and/or use one or more functions, methods, procedures, data structures, classes, and/or other services provided by implementation module 3100 of system 3110. For example, API-calling module 3180 can access a feature of implementation module 3100 through one or more API calls or invocations (e.g., embodied by a function or a method call) exposed by API 3190 (e.g., a software and/or hardware module that can receive API calls, respond to API calls, and/or send API calls) and can pass data and/or control information using one or more parameters via the API calls or
invocations. In some embodiments, API 3190 allows application 3160 to use a service provided by a Software Development Kit (SDK) library. In some embodiments, application 3160 incorporates a call to a function or method provided by the SDK library and provided by API 3190 or uses data types or objects defined in the SDK library and provided by API 3190. In some embodiments, API-calling module 3180 makes an API call via API 3190 to access and use a feature of implementation module 3100 that is specified by API 3190. In such embodiments, implementation module 3100 can return a value via API 3190 to API- calling module 3180 in response to the API call. The value can report to application 3160 the capabilities or state of a hardware component of device 3150, including those related to aspects such as input capabilities and state, output capabilities and state, processing capability, power state, storage capacity and state, and/or communications capability. In some embodiments, API 3190 is implemented in part by firmware, microcode, or other low level logic that executes in part on the hardware component.
[0142] In some embodiments, API 3190 allows a developer of API-calling module 3180 (which can be a third-party developer) to leverage a feature provided by implementation module 3100. In such embodiments, there can be one or more API-calling modules (e.g., including API-calling module 3180) that communicate with implementation module 3100. In some embodiments, API 3190 allows multiple API-calling modules written in different programming languages to communicate with implementation module 3100 (e.g., API 3190 can include features for translating calls and returns between implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180) while API 3190 is implemented in terms of a specific programming language. In some embodiments, API-calling module 3180 calls APIs from different providers such as a set of APIs from an OS provider, another set of APIs from a plug-in provider, and/or another set of APIs from another provider (e.g., the provider of a software library) or creator of the another set of APIs.
[0143] Examples of API 3190 can include one or more of: a pairing API (e.g., for establishing secure connection, e.g., with an accessory), a device detection API (e.g., for locating nearby devices, e.g., media devices and/or smartphone), a payment API, a UIKit API (e.g., for generating user interfaces), a location detection API, a locator API, a maps API, a health sensor API, a sensor API, a messaging API, a push notification API, a streaming API, a collaboration API, a video conferencing API, an application store API, an advertising services API, a web browser API (e.g., WebKit API), a vehicle API, a networking API, a WiFi API, a Bluetooth API, an NFC API, a UWB API, a fitness API, a smart home API,
contact transfer API, photos API, camera API, and/or image processing API. In some embodiments, the sensor API is an API for accessing data associated with a sensor of device 3150. For example, the sensor API can provide access to raw sensor data. For another example, the sensor API can provide data derived (and/or generated) from the raw sensor data. In some embodiments, the sensor data includes temperature data, image data, video data, audio data, heart rate data, IMU (inertial measurement unit) data, lidar data, location data, GPS data, and/or camera data. In some embodiments, the sensor includes one or more of an accelerometer, temperature sensor, infrared sensor, optical sensor, heartrate sensor, barometer, gyroscope, proximity sensor, temperature sensor, and/or biometric sensor.
[0144] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is a system (e.g., operating system and/or server system) software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that is constructed to perform an operation in response to receiving an API call via API 3190. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is constructed to provide an API response (via API 3190) as a result of processing an API call. By way of example, implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180 can each be any one of an operating system, a library, a device driver, an API, an application program, or other module. It should be understood that implementation module 3100 and API-calling module 3180 can be the same or different type of module from each other. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 is embodied at least in part in firmware, microcode, or hardware logic.
[0145] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 returns a value through API 3190 in response to an API call from API-calling module 3180. While API 3190 defines the syntax and result of an API call (e.g., how to invoke the API call and what the API call does), API 3190 might not reveal how implementation module 3100 accomplishes the function specified by the API call. Various API calls are transferred via the one or more application programming interfaces between API-calling module 3180 and implementation module 3100. Transferring the API calls can include issuing, initiating, invoking, calling, receiving, returning, and/or responding to the function calls or messages. In other words, transferring can describe actions by either of API-calling module 3180 or implementation module 3100. In some embodiments, a function call or other invocation of API 3190 sends and/or receives one or more parameters through a parameter list or other structure.
[0146] In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 provides more than one API, each providing a different view of or with different aspects of functionality implemented by
implementation module 3100. For example, one API of implementation module 3100 can provide a first set of functions and can be exposed to third-party developers, and another API of implementation module 3100 can be hidden (e.g., not exposed) and provide a subset of the first set of functions and also provide another set of functions, such as testing or debugging functions which are not in the first set of functions. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100 calls one or more other components via an underlying API and thus is both an API-calling module and an implementation module. It should be recognized that implementation module 3100 can include additional functions, methods, classes, data structures, and/or other features that are not specified through API 3190 and are not available to API-calling module 3180. It should also be recognized that API-calling module 3180 can be on the same system as implementation module 3100 or can be located remotely and access implementation module 3100 using API 3190 over a network. In some embodiments, implementation module 3100, API 3190, and/or API-calling module 3180 is stored in a machine-readable medium, which includes any mechanism for storing information in a form readable by a machine (e.g., a computer or other data processing system). For example, a machine-readable medium can include magnetic disks, optical disks, random access memory; read only memory, and/or flash memory devices.
[0147] An application programming interface (API) is an interface between a first software process and a second software process that specifies a format for communication between the first software process and the second software process. Limited APIs (e.g., private APIs or partner APIs) are APIs that are accessible to a limited set of software processes (e.g., only software processes within an operating system or only software processes that are approved to access the limited APIs). Public APIs that are accessible to a wider set of software processes. Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about or set a state of one or more input devices (e.g., one or more touch sensors, proximity sensors, visual sensors, motion/orientation sensors, pressure sensors, intensity sensors, sound sensors, wireless proximity sensors, biometric sensors, buttons, switches, rotatable elements, and/or external controllers). Some APIs enable software processes to communicate about and/or set a state of one or more output generation components (e.g., one or more audio output generation components, one or more display generation components, and/or one or more tactile output generation components). Some APIs enable particular capabilities (e.g., scrolling, handwriting, text entry, image editing, and/or image creation) to be accessed, performed, and/or used by a software process (e.g., generating outputs for use by a software
process based on input from the software process). Some APIs enable content from a software process to be inserted into a template and displayed in a user interface that has a layout and/or behaviors that are specified by the template.
[0148] Many software platforms include a set of frameworks that provides the core objects and core behaviors that a software developer needs to build software applications that can be used on the software platform. Software developers use these objects to display content onscreen, to interact with that content, and to manage interactions with the software platform. Software applications rely on the set of frameworks for their basic behavior, and the set of frameworks provides many ways for the software developer to customize the behavior of the application to match the specific needs of the software application. Many of these core objects and core behaviors are accessed via an API. An API will typically specify a format for communication between software processes, including specifying and grouping available variables, functions, and protocols. An API call (sometimes referred to as an API request) will typically be sent from a sending software process to a receiving software process as a way to accomplish one or more of the following: the sending software process requesting information from the receiving software process (e.g., for the sending software process to take action on), the sending software process providing information to the receiving software process (e.g., for the receiving software process to take action on), the sending software process requesting action by the receiving software process, or the sending software process providing information to the receiving software process about action taken by the sending software process. Interaction with a device (e.g., using a user interface) will in some circumstances include the transfer and/or receipt of one or more API calls (e.g., multiple API calls) between multiple different software processes (e.g., different portions of an operating system, an application and an operating system, or different applications) via one or more APIs (e.g., via multiple different APIs). For example, when an input is detected the direct sensor data is frequently processed into one or more input events that are provided (e.g., via an API) to a receiving software process that makes some determination based on the input events, and then sends (e.g., via an API) information to a software process to perform an operation (e.g., change a device state and/or user interface) based on the determination. While a determination and an operation performed in response could be made by the same software process, alternatively the determination could be made in a first software process and relayed (e.g., via an API) to a second software process, that is different from the first software process, that causes the operation to be performed by the second software process.
Alternatively, the second software process could relay instructions (e.g., via an API) to a third software process that is different from the first software process and/or the second software process to perform the operation. It should be understood that some or all user interactions with a computer system could involve one or more API calls within a step of interacting with the computer system (e.g., between different software components of the computer system or between a software component of the computer system and a software component of one or more remote computer systems). It should be understood that some or all user interactions with a computer system could involve one or more API calls between steps of interacting with the computer system (e.g., between different software components of the computer system or between a software component of the computer system and a software component of one or more remote computer systems).
[0149] In some embodiments, the application can be any suitable type of application, including, for example, one or more of: a browser application, an application that functions as an execution environment for plug-ins, widgets or other applications, a fitness application, a health application, a digital payments application, a media application, a social network application, a messaging application, and/or a maps application.
[0150] In some embodiments, the application is an application that is pre-installed on the first computer system at purchase (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, the application is an application that is provided to the first computer system via an operating system update file (e.g., a first-party application). In some embodiments, the application is an application that is provided via an application store. In some embodiments, the application store is pre-installed on the first computer system at purchase (e.g., a first-party application store) and allows download of one or more applications. In some embodiments, the application store is a third-party application store (e.g., an application store that is provided by another device, downloaded via a network, and/or read from a storage device). In some embodiments, the application is a third-party application (e.g., an app that is provided by an application store, downloaded via a network, and/or read from a storage device). In some embodiments, the application controls the first computer system to perform processes 1000 and/or 1100 (FIGS. 10 and/or 11) by calling an application programming interface (API) provided by the system process using one or more parameters.
[0151] In some embodiments, exemplary APIs provided by the system process include one or more of: a pairing API (e.g., for establishing secure connection, e.g., with an accessory), a device detection API (e.g., for locating nearby devices, e.g., media devices
and/or smartphone), a payment API, a UIKit API (e.g., for generating user interfaces), a location detection API, a locator API, a maps API, a health sensor API, a sensor API, a messaging API, a push notification API, a streaming API, a collaboration API, a video conferencing API, an application store API, an advertising services API, a web browser API (e.g., WebKit API), a vehicle API, a networking API, a WiFi API, a Bluetooth API, an NFC API, a UWB API, a fitness API, a smart home API, contact transfer API, a photos API, a camera API, and/or an image processing API.
[0152] In some embodiments, at least one API is a software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that provides an interface that allows a different module (e.g., API-calling module) to access and use one or more functions, methods, procedures, data structures, classes, and/or other services provided by an implementation module of the system process. The API can define one or more parameters that are passed between the API-calling module and the implementation module. In some embodiments, API 3190 defines a first API call that can be provided by API-calling module 3180. The implementation module is a system software module (e.g., a collection of computer-readable instructions) that is constructed to perform an operation in response to receiving an API call via the API. In some embodiments, the implementation module is constructed to provide an API response (via the API) as a result of processing an API call. In some embodiments, the implementation module is included in the device (e.g., 3150) that runs the application. In some embodiments, the implementation module is included in an electronic device that is separate from the device that runs the application.
[0153] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces that can be implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 200.
[0154] FIG. 5 A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 200 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are implemented on device 400. In some embodiments, user interface 500 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
[0155] Signal strength indicator(s) 502 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;
• Time 504;
Bluetooth indicator 505;
Battery status indicator 506;
Tray 508 with icons for frequently used applications, such as: o Icon 516 for telephone module 238, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 514 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; o Icon 518 for e-mail client module 240, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 510 of the number of unread e-mails; o Icon 520 for browser module 247, labeled “Browser;” and o Icon 522 for video and music player module 252, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 252, labeled “iPod;” and
• Icons for other applications, such as: o Icon 524 for IM module 241, labeled “Messages;” o Icon 526 for calendar module 248, labeled “Calendar;” o Icon 528 for image management module 244, labeled “Photos;” o Icon 530 for camera module 243, labeled “Camera;” o Icon 532 for online video module 255, labeled “Online Video;” o Icon 534 for stocks widget 249-2, labeled “Stocks;” o Icon 536 for map module 254, labeled “Maps;” o Icon 538 for weather widget 249-1, labeled “Weather;” o Icon 540 for alarm clock widget 249-4, labeled “Clock;” o Icon 542 for workout support module 242, labeled “Workout Support;” o Icon 544 for notes module 253, labeled “Notes;” and o Icon 546 for a settings application or module, labeled “Settings,” which provides access to settings for device 200 and its various applications 236.
[0156] It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG. 5A are merely exemplary. For example, icon 522 for video and music player module 252 is optionally labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application
corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.
[0157] FIG. 5B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 400, FIG. 4A) with a touch-sensitive surface 551 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 455, FIG. 4A) that is separate from the display 550 (e.g., touch screen display 212). Device 400 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 459) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 551 and/or one or more tactile output generators 457 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 400.
[0158] Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 212 (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 5B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 551 in FIG. 5B) has a primary axis (e.g., 552 in FIG. 5B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 553 in FIG. 5B) on the display (e.g., 550). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 560 and 562 in FIG. 5B) with the touch- sensitive surface 551 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in FIG. 5B, 560 corresponds to 568 and 562 corresponds to 570). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 560 and 562, and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch- sensitive surface (e.g., 551 in FIG. 5B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., 550 in FIG. 5B) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.
[0159] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are
simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.
[0160] FIG. 6A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 600. Device 600 includes body 602. In some embodiments, device 600 includes some or all of the features described with respect to devices 200 and 400 (e.g., FIGS. 2A-4A). In some embodiments, device 600 has touch-sensitive display screen 604, hereafter touch screen 604. Alternatively, or in addition to touch screen 604, device 600 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices 200 and 400, in some embodiments, touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) has one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied. The one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) provide output data that represents the intensity of touches. The user interface of device 600 responds to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 600.
[0161] Techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in related applications: International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/040061, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” filed May 8, 2013, and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/069483, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships,” filed November 11, 2013, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
[0162] In some embodiments, device 600 has one or more input mechanisms 606 and 608. Input mechanisms 606 and 608, if included, are physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, device 600 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 600 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device 600 to be worn by a user.
[0163] FIG. 6B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 600. In some embodiments, device 600 includes some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS. 2 A, 2B, and 4 A. Device 600 has bus 612 that operatively couples VO section 614 with one or more computer processors 616 and memory 618. I/O section 614 is connected to display 604, which can have touch-sensitive component 622 and, optionally, touch-intensity sensitive
component 624. In addition, I/O section 614 is connected with communication unit 630 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques. Device 600 includes input mechanisms 606 and/or 608. Input mechanism 606 is a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example. Input mechanism 608 is a button, in some examples.
[0164] Input mechanism 608 is a microphone, in some examples. Personal electronic device 600 includes, for example, various sensors, such as GPS sensor 632, accelerometer 634, directional sensor 640 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 636, motion sensor 638, and/or a combination thereof, all of which are operatively connected to VO section 614.
[0165] Memory 618 of personal electronic device 600 is a non-transitory computer- readable storage medium, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 616, for example, cause the computer processors to perform the techniques and processes described below. The computerexecutable instructions, for example, are also stored and/or transported within any non- transitory computer-readable storage medium for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processorcontaining system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions. Personal electronic device 600 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 6B, but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations.
[0166] As used here, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, for example, displayed on the display screen of devices 200, 400, and/or 600 (FIGS. 2A, 4A, and 6A-6B). For example, an image (e.g., icon), a button, and text (e.g., hyperlink) each constitutes an affordance.
[0167] As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 455 in FIG. 4A or touch-sensitive surface 551 in FIG. 5B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some
implementations that include a touch screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212 in FIG. 2 A or touch screen 212 in FIG. 5 A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user’s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).
[0168] As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent
maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.
[0169] In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm is applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
[0170] The intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface is characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds, such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity thresholds. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a
button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.
[0171] An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is greater than zero.
[0172] In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input
intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input).
[0173] In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input).
Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).
[0174] For ease of explanation, the descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally,
performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold.
3. Digital Assistant System
[0175] FIG. 7A illustrates a block diagram of digital assistant system 700 in accordance with various examples. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 is implemented on a standalone computer system. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 is distributed across multiple computers. In some examples, some of the modules and functions of the digital assistant are divided into a server portion and a client portion, where the client portion resides on one or more user devices (e.g., devices 104, 122, 200, 400, or 600) and communicates with the server portion (e.g., server system 108) through one or more networks, e.g., as shown in FIG. 1. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 is an implementation of server system 108 (and/or DA server 106) shown in FIG. 1. It should be noted that digital assistant system 700 is only one example of a digital assistant system, and that digital assistant system 700 can have more or fewer components than shown, can combine two or more components, or can have a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG. 7A are implemented in hardware, software instructions for execution by one or more processors, firmware, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits, or a combination thereof.
[0176] Digital assistant system 700 includes memory 702, one or more processors 704, input/output (VO) interface 706, and network communications interface 708. These components can communicate with one another over one or more communication buses or signal lines 710.
[0177] In some examples, memory 702 includes a non-transitory computer-readable medium, such as high-speed random access memory and/or a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium (e.g., one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices).
[0178] In some examples, I/O interface 706 couples input/output devices 716 of digital assistant system 700, such as displays, keyboards, touch screens, and microphones, to user interface module 722. I/O interface 706, in conjunction with user interface module 722, receives user inputs (e.g., voice input, keyboard inputs, touch inputs, etc.) and processes them accordingly. In some examples, e.g., when the digital assistant is implemented on a
standalone user device, digital assistant system 700 includes any of the components and I/O communication interfaces described with respect to devices 200, 400, or 600 in FIGS. 2 A, 4A, 6A-6B, respectively. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 represents the server portion of a digital assistant implementation, and can interact with the user through a client-side portion residing on a user device (e.g., devices 104, 200, 400, or 600).
[0179] In some examples, the network communications interface 708 includes wired communication port(s) 712 and/or wireless transmission and reception circuitry 714. The wired communication port(s) receives and send communication signals via one or more wired interfaces, e.g., Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc. The wireless circuitry 714 receives and sends RF signals and/or optical signals from/to communications networks and other communications devices. The wireless communications use any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, such as GSM, EDGE, CDMA, TDMA, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, VoIP, Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol. Network communications interface 708 enables communication between digital assistant system 700 with networks, such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN), and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices.
[0180] In some examples, memory 702, or the computer-readable storage media of memory 702, stores programs, modules, instructions, and data structures including all or a subset of: operating system 718, communications module 720, user interface module 722, one or more applications 724, and digital assistant module 726. In particular, memory 702, or the computer-readable storage media of memory 702, stores instructions for performing the processes described below. One or more processors 704 execute these programs, modules, and instructions, and reads/writes from/to the data structures.
[0181] Operating system 718 (e.g, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, iOS, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g, memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communications between various hardware, firmware, and software components.
[0182] Communications module 720 facilitates communications between digital assistant system 700 with other devices over network communications interface 708. For example, communications module 720 communicates with RF circuitry 208 of electronic devices such
as devices 200, 400, and 600 shown in FIGS. 2A, 4A, 6A-6B, respectively. Communications module 720 also includes various components for handling data received by wireless circuitry 714 and/or wired communications port 712.
[0183] User interface module 722 receives commands and/or inputs from a user via I/O interface 706 (e.g., from a keyboard, touch screen, pointing device, controller, and/or microphone), and generate user interface objects on a display. User interface module 722 also prepares and delivers outputs (e.g., speech, sound, animation, text, icons, vibrations, haptic feedback, light, etc.) to the user via the I/O interface 706 (e.g., through displays, audio channels, speakers, touch-pads, etc.).
[0184] Applications 724 include programs and/or modules that are configured to be executed by one or more processors 704. For example, if the digital assistant system is implemented on a standalone user device, applications 724 include user applications, such as games, a calendar application, a navigation application, or an email application. If digital assistant system 700 is implemented on a server, applications 724 include resource management applications, diagnostic applications, or scheduling applications, for example.
[0185] Memory 702 also stores digital assistant module 726 (or the server portion of a digital assistant). In some examples, digital assistant module 726 includes the following submodules, or a subset or superset thereof: input/output processing module 728, speech-to-text (STT) processing module 730, natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738, and speech synthesis processing module 740. Each of these modules has access to one or more of the following systems or data and models of the digital assistant module 726, or a subset or superset thereof: ontology 760, vocabulary index 744, user data 748, task flow models 754, service models 756, and ASR systems 758.
[0186] In some examples, using the processing modules, data, and models implemented in digital assistant module 726, the digital assistant can perform at least some of the following: converting speech input into text; identifying a user’s intent expressed in a natural language input received from the user; actively eliciting and obtaining information needed to fully infer the user’s intent (e.g., by disambiguating words, games, intentions, etc.); determining the task flow for fulfilling the inferred intent; and executing the task flow to fulfill the inferred intent.
[0187] In some examples, as shown in FIG. 7B, I/O processing module 728 interacts with the user through I/O devices 716 in FIG. 7A or with a user device (e.g., devices 104, 200, 400, or 600) through network communications interface 708 in FIG. 7A to obtain user input (e.g., a speech input) and to provide responses (e.g., as speech outputs) to the user input. I/O processing module 728 optionally obtains contextual information associated with the user input from the user device, along with or shortly after the receipt of the user input. The contextual information includes user-specific data, vocabulary, and/or preferences relevant to the user input. In some examples, the contextual information also includes software and hardware states of the user device at the time the user request is received, and/or information related to the surrounding environment of the user at the time that the user request was received. In some examples, VO processing module 728 also sends follow-up questions to, and receive answers from, the user regarding the user request. When a user request is received by I/O processing module 728 and the user request includes speech input, I/O processing module 728 forwards the speech input to STT processing module 730 (or speech recognizer) for speech-to-text conversions.
[0188] STT processing module 730 includes one or more ASR systems 758. The one or more ASR systems 758 can process the speech input that is received through I/O processing module 728 to produce a recognition result. Each ASR system 758 includes a front-end speech pre-processor. The front-end speech pre-processor extracts representative features from the speech input. For example, the front-end speech pre-processor performs a Fourier transform on the speech input to extract spectral features that characterize the speech input as a sequence of representative multi-dimensional vectors. Further, each ASR system 758 includes one or more speech recognition models (e.g., acoustic models and/or language models) and implements one or more speech recognition engines. Examples of speech recognition models include Hidden Markov Models, Gaussian-Mixture Models, Deep Neural Network Models, n-gram language models, and other statistical models. Examples of speech recognition engines include the dynamic time warping based engines and weighted finite- state transducers (WFST) based engines. The one or more speech recognition models and the one or more speech recognition engines are used to process the extracted representative features of the front-end speech pre-processor to produce intermediate recognitions results (e.g., phonemes, phonemic strings, and sub-words), and ultimately, text recognition results (e.g., words, word strings, or sequence of tokens). In some examples, the speech input is processed at least partially by a third-party service or on the user’s device (e.g., device 104,
200, 400, or 600) to produce the recognition result. Once STT processing module 730 produces recognition results containing a text string (e.g., words, or sequence of words, or sequence of tokens), the recognition result is passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction. In some examples, STT processing module 730 produces multiple candidate text representations of the speech input. Each candidate text representation is a sequence of words or tokens corresponding to the speech input. In some examples, each candidate text representation is associated with a speech recognition confidence score. Based on the speech recognition confidence scores, STT processing module 730 ranks the candidate text representations and provides the n-best (e.g., n highest ranked) candidate text representation(s) to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction, where n is a predetermined integer greater than zero. For example, in one example, only the highest ranked (n=l) candidate text representation is passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction. In another example, the five highest ranked (n=5) candidate text representations are passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction.
[0189] More details on the speech-to-text processing are described in U.S. Utility Application Serial No. 13/236,942 for “Consolidating Speech Recognition Results,” filed on September 20, 2011, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
[0190] In some examples, STT processing module 730 includes and/or accesses a vocabulary of recognizable words via phonetic alphabet conversion module 731. Each vocabulary word is associated with one or more candidate pronunciations of the word represented in a speech recognition phonetic alphabet. In particular, the vocabulary of recognizable words includes a word that is associated with a plurality of candidate pronunciations. For example, the vocabulary includes the word “tomato” that is associated with the candidate pronunciations of /ta'meirou/ and /ta'matoo/. Further, vocabulary words are associated with custom candidate pronunciations that are based on previous speech inputs from the user. Such custom candidate pronunciations are stored in STT processing module 730 and are associated with a particular user via the user’s profile on the device. In some examples, the candidate pronunciations for words are determined based on the spelling of the word and one or more linguistic and/or phonetic rules. In some examples, the candidate pronunciations are manually generated, e.g., based on known canonical pronunciations.
[0191] In some examples, the candidate pronunciations are ranked based on the commonness of the candidate pronunciation. For example, the candidate pronunciation /ta'meirou/ is ranked higher than /ta'motou/, because the former is a more commonly used
pronunciation (e.g., among all users, for users in a particular geographical region, or for any other appropriate subset of users). In some examples, candidate pronunciations are ranked based on whether the candidate pronunciation is a custom candidate pronunciation associated with the user. For example, custom candidate pronunciations are ranked higher than canonical candidate pronunciations. This can be useful for recognizing proper nouns having a unique pronunciation that deviates from canonical pronunciation. In some examples, candidate pronunciations are associated with one or more speech characteristics, such as geographic origin, nationality, or ethnicity. For example, the candidate pronunciation /ta'meirou/ is associated with the United States, whereas the candidate pronunciation /to' mat 00/ is associated with Great Britain. Further, the rank of the candidate pronunciation is based on one or more characteristics (e.g., geographic origin, nationality, ethnicity, etc.) of the user stored in the user’s profile on the device. For example, it can be determined from the user’s profile that the user is associated with the United States. Based on the user being associated with the United States, the candidate pronunciation /ta'meirou/ (associated with the United States) is ranked higher than the candidate pronunciation /ta'matoo/ (associated with Great Britain). In some examples, one of the ranked candidate pronunciations is selected as a predicted pronunciation (e.g., the most likely pronunciation).
[0192] When a speech input is received, STT processing module 730 is used to determine the phonemes corresponding to the speech input (e.g., using an acoustic model), and then attempt to determine words that match the phonemes (e.g., using a language model). For example, if STT processing module 730 first identifies the sequence of phonemes /ta'meirou/ corresponding to a portion of the speech input, it can then determine, based on vocabulary index 744, that this sequence corresponds to the word “tomato.”
[0193] In some examples, STT processing module 730 uses approximate matching techniques to determine words in an utterance. Thus, for example, the STT processing module 730 determines that the sequence of phonemes /ta'meirou/ corresponds to the word “tomato,” even if that particular sequence of phonemes is not one of the candidate sequence of phonemes for that word.
[0194] Natural language processing module 732 (“natural language processor”) of the digital assistant takes the n-best candidate text representation(s) (“word sequence(s)” or “token sequence(s)”) generated by STT processing module 730, and attempts to associate each of the candidate text representations with one or more “actionable intents” recognized by the digital assistant. An “actionable intent” (or “user intent”) represents a task that can be
performed by the digital assistant, and can have an associated task flow implemented in task flow models 754. The associated task flow is a series of programmed actions and steps that the digital assistant takes in order to perform the task. The scope of a digital assistant’s capabilities is dependent on the number and variety of task flows that have been implemented and stored in task flow models 754, or in other words, on the number and variety of “actionable intents” that the digital assistant recognizes. The effectiveness of the digital assistant, however, also dependents on the assistant’s ability to infer the correct “actionable intent(s)” from the user request expressed in natural language.
[0195] In some examples, in addition to the sequence of words or tokens obtained from STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732 also receives contextual information associated with the user request, e.g., from I/O processing module 728. The natural language processing module 732 optionally uses the contextual information to clarify, supplement, and/or further define the information contained in the candidate text representations received from STT processing module 730. The contextual information includes, for example, user preferences, hardware, and/or software states of the user device, sensor information collected before, during, or shortly after the user request, prior interactions (e.g., dialogue) between the digital assistant and the user, and the like. As described herein, contextual information is, in some examples, dynamic, and changes with time, location, content of the dialogue, and other factors.
[0196] In some examples, the natural language processing is based on, e.g., ontology 760. Ontology 760 is a hierarchical structure containing many nodes, each node representing either an “actionable intent” or a “property” relevant to one or more of the “actionable intents” or other “properties.” As noted above, an “actionable intent” represents a task that the digital assistant is capable of performing, i.e., it is “actionable” or can be acted on. A “property” represents a parameter associated with an actionable intent or a sub-aspect of another property. A linkage between an actionable intent node and a property node in ontology 760 defines how a parameter represented by the property node pertains to the task represented by the actionable intent node.
[0197] In some examples, ontology 760 is made up of actionable intent nodes and property nodes. Within ontology 760, each actionable intent node is linked to one or more property nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes. Similarly, each property node is linked to one or more actionable intent nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes. For example, as shown in FIG. 7C, ontology 760
includes a “restaurant reservation” node (i.e., an actionable intent node). Property nodes “restaurant,” “date/time” (for the reservation), and “party size” are each directly linked to the actionable intent node (i.e., the “restaurant reservation” node).
[0198] In addition, property nodes “cuisine,” “price range,” “phone number,” and “location” are sub-nodes of the property node “restaurant,” and are each linked to the “restaurant reservation” node (i.e., the actionable intent node) through the intermediate property node “restaurant.” For another example, as shown in FIG. 7C, ontology 760 also includes a “set reminder” node (i.e., another actionable intent node). Property nodes “date/time” (for setting the reminder) and “subject” (for the reminder) are each linked to the “set reminder” node. Since the property “date/time” is relevant to both the task of making a restaurant reservation and the task of setting a reminder, the property node “date/time” is linked to both the “restaurant reservation” node and the “set reminder” node in ontology 760.
[0199] An actionable intent node, along with its linked property nodes, is described as a “domain.” In the present discussion, each domain is associated with a respective actionable intent, and refers to the group of nodes (and the relationships there between) associated with the particular actionable intent. For example, ontology 760 shown in FIG. 7C includes an example of restaurant reservation domain 762 and an example of reminder domain 764 within ontology 760. The restaurant reservation domain includes the actionable intent node “restaurant reservation,” property nodes “restaurant,” “date/time,” and “party size,” and subproperty nodes “cuisine,” “price range,” “phone number,” and “location.” Reminder domain 764 includes the actionable intent node “set reminder,” and property nodes “subject” and “date/time.” In some examples, ontology 760 is made up of many domains. Each domain shares one or more property nodes with one or more other domains. For example, the “date/time” property node is associated with many different domains (e.g., a scheduling domain, a travel reservation domain, a movie ticket domain, etc.), in addition to restaurant reservation domain 762 and reminder domain 764.
[0200] While FIG. 7C illustrates two example domains within ontology 760, other domains include, for example, “find a movie,” “initiate a phone call,” “find directions,” “schedule a meeting,” “send a message,” and “provide an answer to a question,” “read a list,” “providing navigation instructions,” “provide instructions for a task” and so on. A “send a message” domain is associated with a “send a message” actionable intent node, and further includes property nodes such as “recipient(s),” “message type,” and “message body.” The
property node “recipient” is further defined, for example, by the sub-property nodes such as “recipient name” and “message address.”
[0201] In some examples, ontology 760 includes all the domains (and hence actionable intents) that the digital assistant is capable of understanding and acting upon. In some examples, ontology 760 is modified, such as by adding or removing entire domains or nodes, or by modifying relationships between the nodes within the ontology 760.
[0202] In some examples, nodes associated with multiple related actionable intents are clustered under a “super domain” in ontology 760. For example, a “travel” super-domain includes a cluster of property nodes and actionable intent nodes related to travel. The actionable intent nodes related to travel includes “airline reservation,” “hotel reservation,” “car rental,” “get directions,” “find points of interest,” and so on. The actionable intent nodes under the same super domain (e.g., the “travel” super domain) have many property nodes in common. For example, the actionable intent nodes for “airline reservation,” “hotel reservation,” “car rental,” “get directions,” and “find points of interest” share one or more of the property nodes “start location,” “destination,” “departure date/time,” “arrival date/time,” and “party size.”
[0203] In some examples, each node in ontology 760 is associated with a set of words and/or phrases that are relevant to the property or actionable intent represented by the node. The respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node are the so-called “vocabulary” associated with the node. The respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node are stored in vocabulary index 744 in association with the property or actionable intent represented by the node. For example, returning to FIG. 7B, the vocabulary associated with the node for the property of “restaurant” includes words such as “food,” “drinks,” “cuisine,” “hungry,” “eat,” “pizza,” “fast food,” “meal,” and so on. For another example, the vocabulary associated with the node for the actionable intent of “initiate a phone call” includes words and phrases such as “call,” “phone,” “dial,” “ring,” “call this number,” “make a call to,” and so on. The vocabulary index 744 optionally includes words and phrases in different languages.
[0204] Natural language processing module 732 receives the candidate text representations (e.g., text string(s) or token sequence(s)) from STT processing module 730, and for each candidate representation, determines what nodes are implicated by the words in the candidate text representation. In some examples, if a word or phrase in the candidate text
representation is found to be associated with one or more nodes in ontology 760 (via vocabulary index 744), the word or phrase “triggers” or “activates” those nodes. Based on the quantity and/or relative importance of the activated nodes, natural language processing module 732 selects one of the actionable intents as the task that the user intended the digital assistant to perform. In some examples, the domain that has the most “triggered” nodes is selected. In some examples, the domain having the highest confidence value (e.g., based on the relative importance of its various triggered nodes) is selected. In some examples, the domain is selected based on a combination of the number and the importance of the triggered nodes. In some examples, additional factors are considered in selecting the node as well, such as whether the digital assistant has previously correctly interpreted a similar request from a user.
[0205] User data 748 includes user-specific information, such as user-specific vocabulary, user preferences, user address, user’s default and secondary languages, user’s contact list, and other short-term or long-term information for each user. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 uses the user-specific information to supplement the information contained in the user input to further define the user intent. For example, for a user request “invite my friends to my birthday party,” natural language processing module 732 is able to access user data 748 to determine who the “friends” are and when and where the “birthday party” would be held, rather than requiring the user to provide such information explicitly in his/her request.
[0206] It should be recognized that in some examples, natural language processing module 732 is implemented using one or more machine learning mechanisms (e.g., neural networks). In particular, the one or more machine learning mechanisms are configured to receive a candidate text representation and contextual information associated with the candidate text representation. Based on the candidate text representation and the associated contextual information, the one or more machine learning mechanisms are configured to determine intent confidence scores over a set of candidate actionable intents. Natural language processing module 732 can select one or more candidate actionable intents from the set of candidate actionable intents based on the determined intent confidence scores. In some examples, an ontology (e.g., ontology 760) is also used to select the one or more candidate actionable intents from the set of candidate actionable intents.
[0207] Other details of searching an ontology based on a token string are described in U.S. Utility Application Serial No. 12/341,743 for “Method and Apparatus for Searching
Using An Active Ontology,” filed December 22, 2008, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
[0208] In some examples, once natural language processing module 732 identifies an actionable intent (or domain) based on the user request, natural language processing module 732 generates a structured query to represent the identified actionable intent. In some examples, the structured query includes parameters for one or more nodes within the domain for the actionable intent, and at least some of the parameters are populated with the specific information and requirements specified in the user request. For example, the user says “Make me a dinner reservation at a sushi place at 7.” In this case, natural language processing module 732 is able to correctly identify the actionable intent to be “restaurant reservation” based on the user input. According to the ontology, a structured query for a “restaurant reservation” domain includes parameters such as {Cuisine}, {Time}, {Date}, {Party Size}, and the like. In some examples, based on the speech input and the text derived from the speech input using STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732 generates a partial structured query for the restaurant reservation domain, where the partial structured query includes the parameters {Cuisine = “Sushi”} and {Time = “7pm”}. However, in this example, the user’ s utterance contains insufficient information to complete the structured query associated with the domain. Therefore, other necessary parameters such as {Party Size} and {Date} are not specified in the structured query based on the information currently available. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 populates some parameters of the structured query with received contextual information. For example, in some examples, if the user requested a sushi restaurant “near me,” natural language processing module 732 populates a {location} parameter in the structured query with GPS coordinates from the user device.
[0209] In some examples, natural language processing module 732 identifies multiple candidate actionable intents for each candidate text representation received from STT processing module 730. Further, in some examples, a respective structured query (partial or complete) is generated for each identified candidate actionable intent. Natural language processing module 732 determines an intent confidence score for each candidate actionable intent and ranks the candidate actionable intents based on the intent confidence scores. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 passes the generated structured query (or queries), including any completed parameters, to task flow processing module 736 (“task flow processor”). In some examples, the structured query (or queries) for the m-best
(e.g., m highest ranked) candidate actionable intents are provided to task flow processing module 736, where m is a predetermined integer greater than zero. In some examples, the structured query (or queries) for the m-best candidate actionable intents are provided to task flow processing module 736 with the corresponding candidate text representation(s).
[0210] Other details of inferring a user intent based on multiple candidate actionable intents determined from multiple candidate text representations of a speech input are described in U.S. Utility Application Serial No. 14/298,725 for “System and Method for Inferring User Intent From Speech Inputs,” filed June 6, 2014, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
[0211] Task flow processing module 736 is configured to receive the structured query (or queries) from natural language processing module 732, complete the structured query, if necessary, and perform the actions required to “complete” the user’s ultimate request. In some examples, the various procedures necessary to complete these tasks are provided in task flow models 754. In some examples, task flow models 754 include procedures for obtaining additional information from the user and task flows for performing actions associated with the actionable intent.
[0212] As described above, in order to complete a structured query, task flow processing module 736 needs to initiate additional dialogue with the user in order to obtain additional information, and/or disambiguate potentially ambiguous utterances. When such interactions are necessary, task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing module 734 to engage in a dialogue with the user. In some examples, dialogue flow processing module 734 determines how (and/or when) to ask the user for the additional information and receives and processes the user responses. The questions are provided to and answers are received from the users through I/O processing module 728. In some examples, dialogue flow processing module 734 presents dialogue output to the user via audio and/or visual output, and receives input from the user via spoken or physical (e.g., clicking) responses.
Continuing with the example above, when task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing module 734 to determine the “party size” and “date” information for the structured query associated with the domain “restaurant reservation,” dialogue flow processing module 734 generates questions such as “For how many people?” and “On which day?” to pass to the user. Once answers are received from the user, dialogue flow processing module 734 then populates the structured query with the missing information, or pass the
information to task flow processing module 736 to complete the missing information from the structured query.
[0213] Once task flow processing module 736 has completed the structured query for an actionable intent, task flow processing module 736 proceeds to perform the ultimate task associated with the actionable intent. Accordingly, task flow processing module 736 executes the steps and instructions in the task flow model according to the specific parameters contained in the structured query. For example, the task flow model for the actionable intent of “restaurant reservation” includes steps and instructions for contacting a restaurant and actually requesting a reservation for a particular party size at a particular time. For example, using a structured query such as: {restaurant reservation, restaurant = ABC Cafe, date = 3/12/2012, time = 7pm, party size = 5}, task flow processing module 736 performs the steps of: (1) logging onto a server of the ABC Cafe or a restaurant reservation system such as OPENTABLE®, (2) entering the date, time, and party size information in a form on the website, (3) submitting the form, and (4) making a calendar entry for the reservation in the user’s calendar.
[0214] In some examples, task flow processing module 736 employs the assistance of service processing module 738 (“service processing module”) to complete a task requested in the user input or to provide an informational answer requested in the user input. For example, service processing module 738 acts on behalf of task flow processing module 736 to make a phone call, set a calendar entry, invoke a map search, invoke or interact with other user applications installed on the user device, and invoke or interact with third-party services (e.g., a restaurant reservation portal, a social networking website, a banking portal, etc.). In some examples, the protocols and application programming interfaces (API) required by each service are specified by a respective service model among service models 756. Service processing module 738 accesses the appropriate service model for a service and generates requests for the service in accordance with the protocols and APIs required by the service according to the service model.
[0215] For example, if a restaurant has enabled an online reservation service, the restaurant submits a service model specifying the necessary parameters for making a reservation and the APIs for communicating the values of the necessary parameter to the online reservation service. When requested by task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738 establishes a network connection with the online reservation service using the web address stored in the service model, and sends the necessary parameters of the
reservation (e.g., time, date, party size) to the online reservation interface in a format according to the API of the online reservation service.
[0216] In some examples, natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, and task flow processing module 736 are used collectively and iteratively to infer and define the user’s intent, obtain information to further clarify and refine the user intent, and finally generate a response (i.e., an output to the user, or the completion of a task) to fulfill the user’s intent. The generated response is a dialogue response to the speech input that at least partially fulfills the user’s intent. Further, in some examples, the generated response is output as a speech output. In these examples, the generated response is sent to speech synthesis processing module 740 (e.g., speech synthesizer) where it can be processed to synthesize the dialogue response in speech form. In yet other examples, the generated response is data content relevant to satisfying a user request in the speech input.
[0217] In examples where task flow processing module 736 receives multiple structured queries from natural language processing module 732, task flow processing module 736 initially processes the first structured query of the received structured queries to attempt to complete the first structured query and/or execute one or more tasks or actions represented by the first structured query. In some examples, the first structured query corresponds to the highest ranked actionable intent. In other examples, the first structured query is selected from the received structured queries based on a combination of the corresponding speech recognition confidence scores and the corresponding intent confidence scores. In some examples, if task flow processing module 736 encounters an error during processing of the first structured query (e.g., due to an inability to determine a necessary parameter), the task flow processing module 736 can proceed to select and process a second structured query of the received structured queries that corresponds to a lower ranked actionable intent. The second structured query is selected, for example, based on the speech recognition confidence score of the corresponding candidate text representation, the intent confidence score of the corresponding candidate actionable intent, a missing necessary parameter in the first structured query, or any combination thereof.
[0218] Speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to synthesize speech outputs for presentation to the user. Speech synthesis processing module 740 synthesizes speech outputs based on text provided by the digital assistant. For example, the generated dialogue response is in the form of a text string. Speech synthesis processing module 740 converts the text string to an audible speech output. Speech synthesis processing module 740
uses any appropriate speech synthesis technique in order to generate speech outputs from text, including, but not limited, to concatenative synthesis, unit selection synthesis, diphone synthesis, domain-specific synthesis, formant synthesis, articulatory synthesis, hidden Markov model (HMM) based synthesis, and sinewave synthesis. In some examples, speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to synthesize individual words based on phonemic strings corresponding to the words. For example, a phonemic string is associated with a word in the generated dialogue response. The phonemic string is stored in metadata associated with the word. Speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to directly process the phonemic string in the metadata to synthesize the word in speech form.
[0219] In some examples, instead of (or in addition to) using speech synthesis processing module 740, speech synthesis is performed on a remote device (e.g., the server system 108), and the synthesized speech is sent to the user device for output to the user. For example, this can occur in some implementations where outputs for a digital assistant are generated at a server system. And because server systems generally have more processing power or resources than a user device, it is possible to obtain higher quality speech outputs than would be practical with client-side synthesis.
[0220] Additional details on digital assistants can be found in the U.S. Utility Application No. 12/987,982, entitled “Intelligent Automated Assistant,” filed January 10, 2011, and U.S. Utility Application No. 13/251,088, entitled “Generating and Processing Task Items That Represent Tasks to Perform,” filed September 30, 2011, the entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
[0221] As described herein, content is automatically generated by one or more computers in response to a request to generate the content. The automatically-generated content is optionally generated on-device (e.g., generated at least in part by a computer system at which a request to generate the content is received) and/or generated off-device (e.g., generated at least in part by one or more nearby computers that are available via a local network or one or more computers that are available via the internet). This automatically-generated content optionally includes visual content (e.g., images, graphics, and/or video), audio content, and/or text content.
[0222] In some embodiments, novel automatically-generated content that is generated via one or more artificial intelligence (Al) processes is referred to as generative content (e.g., generative images, generative graphics, generative video, generative audio, and/or generative
text). Generative content is typically generated by an Al process based on a prompt that is provided to the Al process. An Al process typically uses one or more Al models to generate an output based on an input. An Al process optionally includes one or more pre-processing steps to adjust the input before it is used by the Al model to generate an output (e.g., adjustment to a user-provided prompt, creation of a system-generated prompt, and/or Al model selection). An Al process optionally includes one or more post-processing steps to adjust the output by the Al model (e.g., passing Al model output to a different Al model, upscaling, downscaling, cropping, formatting, and/or adding or removing metadata) before the output of the Al model used for other purposes such as being provided to a different software process for further processing or being presented (e.g., visually or audibly) to a user. An Al process that generates generative content is sometimes referred to as a generative Al process.
[0223] A prompt for generating generative content can include one or more of: one or more words (e.g., a natural language prompt that is written or spoken), one or more images, one or more drawings, and/or one or more videos. Al processes can include machine learning models including neural networks. Neural networks can include transformer-based deep neural networks such as large language models (LLMs). Generative pre-trained transformer models are a type of LLM that can be effective at generating novel generative content based on a prompt. Some Al processes use a prompt that includes text to generate either different generative text, generative audio content, and/or generative visual content. Some Al processes use a prompt that includes visual content and/or an audio content to generate generative text (e.g., a transcription of audio and/or a description of the visual content). Some multi-modal Al processes use a prompt that includes multiple types of content (e.g., text, images, audio, video, and/or other sensor data) to generate generative content. A prompt sometimes also includes values for one or more parameters indicating an importance of various parts of the prompt. Some prompts include a structured set of instructions that can be understood by an Al process that include phrasing, a specified style, relevant context (e.g., starting point content and/or one or more examples), and/or a role for the Al process.
[0224] Generative content is generally based on the prompt but is not deterministically selected from pre-generated content and is, instead, generated using the prompt as a starting point. In some embodiments, pre-existing content (e.g., audio, text, and/or visual content) is used as part of the prompt for creating generative content (e.g., the pre-existing content is used as a starting point for creating the generative content). For example, a prompt could
request that a block of text be summarized or rewritten in a different tone, and the output would be generative text that is summarized or written in the different tone. Similarly a prompt could request that visual content be modified to include or exclude content specified by a prompt (e.g., removing an identified feature in the visual content, adding a feature to the visual content that is described in a prompt, changing a visual style of the visual content, and/or creating additional visual elements outside of a spatial or temporal boundary of the visual content that are based on the visual content). In some embodiments, a random or pseudo-random seed is used as part of the prompt for creating generative content (e.g., the random or pseud-random seed content is used as a starting point for creating the generative content). For example when generating an image from a diffusion model, a random noise pattern is iteratively denoised based on the prompt to generate an image that is based on the prompt. While specific types of Al processes have been described herein, it should be understood that a variety of different Al processes could be used to generate generative content based on a prompt.
4. Commands Using Secondary Device Gestures
[0225] FIGS. 8A-8E and 9A-9C illustrate systems for commands using secondary device gestures. For example, device 802 may include any device described herein, including but not limited to devices 104, 200, 400, and 600 (FIGS. 1, 2A, 4 A, and 6A-6B). Thus, it will be appreciated that device 802 associated with FIGS. 8A-8E and 9A-9C may correspond to a user device, such as a laptop computer, tablet, phone, and the like. Device 804 may correspond to a wearable device such as headphones, smart glasses, or a head-mounted display for example. Furthermore, the processes described herein may be performed by a server with information delivered to and from the device, performed on the device, or a combination thereof. In addition, as described herein, the motion data may remain on the secondary device and audio events may be generated by and played by the second device accordingly. In some embodiments, the first electronic device and the second electronic device may be retained within a singular device (e.g., a head-mounted display with microphone, speakers, etc.).
[0226] With reference to FIG. 8A, in general, a user may interact with a plurality of devices within environment 800, such as devices 802 and 804, within the context of a gesture-response framework. Device 802 may correspond to a smartphone and device 804 may correspond to a plurality of headphones or earbuds. Devices 802 and 804 may further be
communicatively coupled via one or more wireless connections. In some examples, user 806 may utilize devices 802 and 804 to perform various functions, such as listen to music, engage in communication sessions (e.g., telephone calls, text messaging, video calls, etc.), interact with a digital assistant, and the like. For instance, device 802 may receive a phone call from another electronic device, such that the caller leaves a voicemail when user 806 does not answer the call. The caller may correspond to a contact stored on device 802, such as a contact named “John.” Once the voicemail is obtained on device 802 (e.g., stored locally and/or stored on a server), device 802 may detect an event alert corresponding to the received voicemail. In some cases, user 806 may not be actively using device 802 (e.g., device 802 is locked and/or resting on a surface away from the user). In such cases, device 802 may then provide a message to user 806 by way of device 804. Specifically, device 802 may cause audible message 808 to be provided at device 804, such as “You have a new voicemail from John. Would you like to listen?” In this example, audible message 808 includes a question or interrogatory for the user to respond to. The question may be optional in nature such that the user is not required to provide a response. For instance, if the user does not take any action on the prompt, device 802 may infer that the user does not wish to proceed with the respective task (e.g., listening to a voicemail), and thus, device 802 takes no action. The event alert and corresponding message may include a variety of different types of alerts and potential actions, such as incoming calls, incoming text messages, reminders associated with one or more applications (e.g., calendars, social media, lifestyle, productivity), alarms, application notifications, and the like.
[0227] In some cases, message 808 provided to device 804 may include a summary or brief explanation of the event alert. For instance, the message may include contents such as “You have a new long text message from Mary. Would you like to hear it?” In some cases, the message may include the contents of the received message (e.g., if the received message is less than a predefined character length) and a prompt to perform a related task, such as “John says ‘Are you coming?’ Would you like to respond?” Messages may also be received at device 802 from a plurality of users, such as a predefined group within a messaging application. In these cases, the message provided to device 804 may include contents such as “There are ten new messages in the group chat. Would you like to hear them?” or “There are 20 new messages in the group chat. Would you like to silence chat notifications for the group?”
[0228] With reference now to FIGS. 8B and 8C, once message 808 is provided to device 804, device 802 may begin receiving motion data from device 804. In particular, the motion data may correspond to motion of device 804 as the user makes various movements, such as head gestures corresponding to affirmative actions (e.g., acceptances) or negative actions (e.g., rejections). For instance, device 804 may include one or more inertial measurement units (IMU) which may provide various measurements such as rotation rates and acceleration rates of device 804. As user 806 makes head movements, such as nodding or shaking, the IMU information may reflect the user’s head movements via the acceleration and rotation rates in the form of X, Y, and Z coordinate information, for example. The motion data may then be received at device 802 such that device 802 then processes the motion data in order to classify the data. Generally, the motion data may be sampled, for example, at a rate of 25 Hz with prediction window sizes of 20, 25, or 30 samples. The motion data may be provided to a classifier which determines a label for the motion data, such as labels for “Yes” (e.g., a gesture consistent with a nod or other confirmatory gesture), “No” (e.g., a gesture consistent with a back and forth shake or other rejection-type gesture), or “No Gesture,” indicating that the motion data does not correspond to a “Yes” or “No” gesture with sufficient confidence. Each set of received motion data may be used to obtain a motion classification probability associated with a particular gesture. For example, if user 806 performs a head nod gesture as shown in FIG. 8B, the classifier may assign a label to the motion data for “Yes” as having a high confidence (e.g., 0.93 or 93%). In this case, the classifier may assign a label to the motion data for “No” “No Gesture” as having low confidences (e.g., 0.05 and 0.02, respectively). To the extent a label exceeds a threshold confidence (e.g., 85%), the corresponding motion data may be classified based on the corresponding label (e.g., “Yes” in this example).
[0229] With reference now to FIG. 8D, various mechanisms may be employed in order to provide the user with feedback regarding the gesture-response framework. For instance, prior to the message being provided to device 804, an announce tone 810a may be provided at device 804. Once announce tone 810a is provided, the respective message 812a is provided at device 804, such as “New long message from Justin. Listen now?”. After message 812a is provided, continuous audible sound 814a is provided to device 804 in order to indicate to the user that devices 802 and/or 804 are waiting for and actively detecting whether a gesture input is performed by the user. Continuous audible sound 814a may be provided for a predetermined amount of time (e.g., 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) and may include
a soft continuous tone such that the user is made aware that the device is in a “listening mode” or “waiting loop.” In some instances, devices 802 and/or 804 may begin actively detecting whether a gesture input is performed prior to continuous audible sound 814a being provided, such as when announce tone 810a begins to be provided or when message 812a begins to be provided. In some examples, device 804 may provide one or more initial audible messages to the user (e.g., during device setup, prior to or after a message is received, etc.) informing the user that the user may respond to various messaging using head gestures (e.g., “You can respond to this message by nodding or shaking your head.”). Device 802 may also provide various displayed and/or audible messages including training for the user to inform the user of device capabilities with respect to head gestures.
[0230] During the predetermined time for which continuous audible sound 814a is provided, device 802 may receive motion data from device 804 and determine one or more gestures based on the motion data as described with respect to FIGS. 8B-8C. To the extent device 802 determines a respective gesture with sufficient confidence, a confirmation sound 816a is provided at device 804. For instance, if user 806 performs a gesture consistent with a nod or other confirmatory gesture, a positive confirmation sound may be provided (e.g., a light chime, ring, or other sound). Alternatively, if user 806 performs a gesture consistent with a back-and-forth shake or other rejection-type gesture, a negative confirmation sound may be provided, such as a tone that is inverted (e.g., inverted in tone, melody, or other acoustic characteristics) relative to the positive confirmation sound. Once confirmation sound 816a is provided, continuous audible sound 814a may stop being provided in order to indicate that device 804 is no longer listening for a gesture-type input. In some cases, user 806 may not perform any gestures which are determined to have a high enough confidence to be confirmatory -type or rejection-type gestures. In such cases, continuous audible sound 814a may continue to be provided for the predetermined duration. If the predetermined duration expires without any gestures being detected with sufficient confidence, then continuous audible sound 814a may stop being provided in order to indicate that device 804 is no longer listening for a gesture-type input. In some examples, a confirmation sound may be provided at the end of the predetermined duration, while in other examples, continuous audible sound 814a is ended without a confirmation sound.
[0231] With reference to FIG. 8E, in some examples, dynamic feedback may be provided to indicate detection progress with respect to an individual gesture being detected. For example, announce tone 810b, message 812b, and continuous audible sound 814b are
provided as described with respect to FIG. 8D. While continuous audible sound 814b is provided, gesture feedback 818b is also provided to device 804. Gesture feedback 818b may generally include a plurality of short discrete tones (referred to as “pings,” “tinks,” etc.) to indicate the detection progress of an overall gesture. For instance, user 806 may begin to make a “nod” gesture, such that the user tilts the user’s head upwards. A first partial gesture (e.g., head movement upwards) may thus be detected by device 802 based on respective partial gesture criteria, such as whether the rotation rates and acceleration data correspond to a head movement upwards. In addition, heuristics based on the velocity of head motions is also used to trigger the partial gesture feedback. Thus, the velocity of head motions which are consistent with the user moving their head upwards, for example, can be used to detect corresponding partial gestures. Accordingly, a first tone may be provided to device 804 to indicate the first initial movement point of the respective “nod” gesture. Similarly, user 806 may then tilt their head downwards, such that a second partial gesture (e.g., head movement downwards) may be detected by device 802 based on respective partial gesture criteria, such as whether the rotation rates and acceleration data correspond to a head movement downwards. As a result, a second tone is provided to device 804 indicate the second movement point of the respective “nod” gesture. As the gesture progresses, additional short discrete tones may continue to be provided throughout the duration of the gesture (e.g., a third tone provided for another head movement upwards, a fourth tone provided for another head movement downwards, etc.). Each successive audible tone may be distinct from the other audible tones. For example, a first audible tone of gesture feedback 818b may be relatively lower in volume, tone, intensity, or other acoustic features. A second audible tone may be slightly or moderately higher in volume, tone, intensity, or other acoustic features than the first audible tone. A third audible tone may be slightly or moderately sufficiently higher in volume, tone, intensity, or other acoustic features than the second audible tone. This pattern may continue for each audible tone of gesture feedback 818b. To the extent the user performs a partial gesture (e.g., the user raises the user’s head upwards), but does not perform any additional partial gestures to complete a gesture, device 802 may eventually reset listening and thus begin listening for new gestures within the waiting loop period.
[0232] To the extent a confirmatory -type or rejection-type gesture is detected corresponding to the message, an output is provided at device 804 based on the gesture, and a respective task associated with the event alert and/or the message is performed. For example, in response to the event alert corresponding to a new voicemail from contact named “John,”
and corresponding question as to whether the user would like to listen to the voicemail, user 806 may perform a “nod” gesture. In response to the detected “nod” gesture, an acceptancetype confirmatory tone is provided at device 804 as discussed with respect to FIGS. 8D-8E. Furthermore, a corresponding task is performed based on the user’s acceptance gesture input. Specifically, in this case, device 802 may deliver the voicemail audio to device 804. As another example, in response to the event alert corresponding to a new long message from a contact named “Justin,” and corresponding question as to whether the user would like to listen to the message, user 806 may perform a back-and-forth head shake gesture. In response to the detected “no” gesture, a rejection -type confirmatory tone is provided at device 804 as discussed with respect to FIGS. 8D-8E. Furthermore, a corresponding task is performed based on the user’s rejection gesture input. Specifically, in this case, device 802 may provide a brief follow-up confirmation of the rejection, such as “Okay,” or “Got it.” Alternatively, in response to the rejection-type gesture, the rejection-type confirmatory tone is provided without any additional audible output, such that device 802 ceases to receive the motion data from device 804 and accordingly, ceases to detect corresponding gestures. Various other tasks may be performed depending on the event alert and corresponding message, such as connecting an audio call from device 802 to device 804, transmitting a message from device 802 (e.g., text message or e-mail based on dictation from user 806 at device 804), creating or modifying a calendar entry, reading an application notification, and the like.
[0233] In general, the gesture-response framework may be implemented in a variety of ways. For instance, instead of (or in addition to) utilizing the “listening mode” or “waiting loop,” one or more discrete tones or other type of indication(s) may be provided to the user to indicate that additional content can be provided if the user provides a confirmatory -type gesture. For example, with reference to FIG. 8F, an announce tone 810c may be provided at the second electronic device prior to message 812c being provided. Message 812c may include a general subject, topic, or other information summarizing the contents of a received message. In some examples, the message summary is provided when the message contents exceed a particular length (e.g., word count, character count, etc.). In this example, message 812c may include an audible output such as “New message from Ron about lunch plans.” Generally, the message summary may be generated based on various natural language processing techniques to identify concepts or other keywords within the text. Once message 812c is provided, a specific tone 820c may then be provided to indicate to the user that the
device is listening for a confirmation gesture. Tone 820c may include one or more discrete tones that vary in volume, intensity, pitch, etc.
[0234] Once tone 820c is provided, the first device may receive motion data corresponding to movement of the second device and subsequently determine a gesture based on the motion data as described above with respect to FIGS 8A-8E. To the extent a rejectiontype gesture is determined, the first device may optionally provide an output indicating the rejection-type gesture was detected and then take no further action on the received message (not depicted). Alternatively, to the extent a confirmatory-type gesture 822c is determined, the first device may cause output 824c to be provided, including additional content corresponding to the full contents of the received message.
[0235] In some embodiments, the gesture-response framework may be utilized to provide contextual response suggestions based on an incoming message. Additional details on providing contextual response suggestions based on an incoming message can be found in U.S. Utility Application No. 18/373,211, entitled “Contextual Response Suggestions Using Secondary Electronic Device,” filed September 26, 2023, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/462,956, entitled “Contextual Response Suggestions Using Secondary Electronic Device,” filed April 28, 2023, the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
[0236] As discussed herein, once an event alert is detected, a message associated with the event alert is provided at the second electronic device. In some embodiments, the message may include a first portion and a second portion. The first portion of the received message may include the incoming text message contents (or alternatively, a summary of the text message) such as “John says ‘When does your flight land?’”. The second portion may include an indication of a potential response message to be sent back to the message sender. Based on one or more queries identified in the received message, data sources may be located to obtain results to satisfy the query. In this example, the identified query may be resolved by retrieving flight information from an application such as an e-mail application, calendar application, 3rd party flight application, etc. The current flight status information is then used to prepare a response message to be sent back to the message sender “John.” In particular, the flight status information may include “On time, arriving at 8:20PM today.” The second portion of the message provided to the second electronic device may thus include prepared response message “My flight arrives at 8:20PM.” Once the first and second portions are provided, the device may begin receiving motion data and determine a gesture
based on the motion data. To the extent a rejection -type gesture is determined, the first device may optionally provide an output indicating the rejection-type gesture was detected and then take no further action on the received message. Alternatively, to the extent a confirmatory-type gesture is determined, the first device may transmit the corresponding prepared response message as a message to the message sender (e.g., “On time, arriving at 8:20PM today ”), and provide an output at the second device indicating the message was sent.
[0237] The gesture-response framework may also be used in order to confirm one or more options provided by the digital assistant. For instance, the user may have dictated a message to be sent to another contact stored on the user’s device. Once the message has been dictated, the digital assistant may ask the user for confirmation, such as “Okay, the message says ‘I’ll be there soon.’ Send it?” The user may then respond to the question as using either a confirmatory -type gesture or rejection-type gesture as discussed herein. If the device detects the confirmatory-type gesture, the message is sent to the respective user. If the device detects the rejection-type gesture, the device does not send the message. The user may also respond via other various modalities such as touch input and/or voice input.
[0238] With reference now to FIG. 9A, an environment 900 is depicted including a user utilizing an early dismissal framework, such that audible outputs may be aborted based on user gestures. In particular, user 906 may utilize devices 902 and 904 as described with respect to FIGS. 8A-8B. Message 908 may be received at device 904 corresponding to an event alert detected at device 902. For instance, message 908 may include an audible output “New long message from John. John says ‘Thanks for reaching out. My initial thoughts are . . . ’” As explained in more detail below, message 908 may continue to be read out until a rejection-type gesture is detected from user 906. In some cases, prior to the message being delivered to device 804, an informational prompt may be provided to device 804 indicating that message read-outs may be aborted if the user performed a specific gesture, such as a rejection-type gesture (e.g., “You can dismiss this message by shaking your head.”).
[0239] With reference to FIGS. 9B-9C, as the message is provided at device 904, user 906 may perform a gesture such as a back-and-forth head shake. Accordingly, device 906 may determine a rejection -type gesture being performed by user 906 based on the motion data received from device 904. More specifically, an initial announce tone 908 is provided at device 904, wherein once the announce tone 908 is provided, device 902 begins receiving motion data from device 904 and accordingly begins determining whether user 906 has performed a gesture. The gesture determination at device 902 may occur concurrently or
otherwise in parallel with the read-out of message 910 at device 904. Accordingly, to the extent a rejection-type gesture is determined prior to the read-out of message 910 being finished, a corresponding task is performed at device 902. Specifically, device 902 stops providing message 910 to device 904. In addition, a confirmation sound 912 may also be provided at device 904 (e.g., a short audible tone) as message 910 ceases to be provided (e.g., slightly before, at the same time, or slightly after message 910 ceases to be provided). Alternatively, to the extent the user makes other types of gestures, such as an affirmatory nod, device 902 will continue to read out message 910 until either the message read-out has completed or device 902 detects a rejection-type gesture. In some cases, when the early dismissal framework is employed, the dynamic feedback discussed with respect to FIG. 8E may also be employed to indicate detection progress with respect to an individual gesture being detected.
[0240] In some cases, the early dismissal framework may not be employed under certain circumstances. For example, some messages provided at device 904 may include questions or other prompts which solicit either a positive response or negative response from the user. A scenario involving a message including interrogatory sentence or phrase (e.g., “You have ten events scheduled today. Would you like to hear them?”) along with a plurality of predetermined potential user responses (e.g., Yes, No) may result in the early dismissal framework not being employed, such that the gesture-response framework described in FIGS. 8A-8E is alternatively employed. This determination may be made at device 902 at the time of detecting the event alert and generating the corresponding message for delivery at device 904, for example. In other words, in cases where the user may hypothetically provide a rejection-type input that corresponds to a negative answer to a question prompt (e.g., whether the user would like to hear a read-out of today’s events), device 902 will not cease reading out a respective message in response to detecting of a rejection-type gesture, but rather, with perform a respective task based on the rejection-type gesture (e.g., device 902 will forgo reading out today’s events). Likewise, in such a scenario, device 902 will also listen for acceptance-type gestures and perform appropriate tasks, as described with respect to FIGS. 8A-8E. Alternatively, if device 902 determines that a question prompt has not yet been read (e.g., only an initial portion of the message has been audibly delivered to device 904), the early dismissal framework may be employed. Once device 902 determines that the question prompt has been provided soliciting a positive or negative response, the early dismissal
framework may no longer apply, such that the gesture-response framework described with respect to FIGS. 8A-8E now applies.
[0241] In general, the early dismissal framework discussed above can be utilized in a variety of use cases. For example, the user may be engaged in a back-and-forth interaction with a digital assistant, such that the user has uttered a command and the digital assistant is in the process of responding to the command, such as by outputting an audible response “Okay, I found a few restaurants for you. ABC Diner is a favorite ... .” During the audible response, the user may begin to shake their head consistent with a rejection-type gesture. Based on the detection of the rejection-type gesture using the techniques disclosed herein, the digital assistant may cease providing the audible output.
[0242] FIGS. 10-11 illustrate processes 1000 and 1100 for contextual response suggestions according to various examples. Processes 1000 and 1100 are performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a digital assistant. In some examples, processes 1000 and 1100 are performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of processes 1000 and 1100 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device. In other examples, the blocks of processes 1000 and 1100 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch). Thus, while portions of processes 1000 and 1100 are described herein as being performed by particular devices of a client-server system, it will be appreciated that processes 1000 and 1100 are not so limited. In other examples, processes 1000 and 1100 are performed using only a client device (e.g., user device 104) or only multiple client devices. In processes 1000 and 1100, some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with processes 1000 and 1100.
[0243] With reference to FIG. 10, at block 1002, in some embodiments, a first electronic device detects an event alert. In some embodiments, the event alert corresponds to one of an incoming call, an incoming text message, a reminder, and an application notification. At block 1004, the first electronic device causes a message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert. In some embodiments, the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message, and the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert corresponds to
an indication that the incoming text message exceeds a threshold character length. In some embodiments, the incoming text message corresponds to a group text message, and wherein the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert includes an option to silence the group text message. In some embodiments, the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message that does not exceed a threshold character length and the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert includes the contents of the incoming text message. In some embodiments, in response to causing (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) the message to be provided at the second electronic device, the first electronic device causes a continuous audible sound to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein the continuous audible sound is provided for a predetermined period of time. In some embodiments, the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message, and the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert includes a subject of the incoming text message. In some embodiments, causing the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) to be provided at the second electronic device includes causing a first portion of the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein the first portion of the message includes at least a portion of the contents of an incoming text message, and causing a second portion of the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein the second portion of the message includes a prompt indicating a response message subject.
[0244] By providing a continuous audible sound during the waiting loop, the system enhances device functionality by providing enhanced feedback to the user. This enhanced feedback makes the device more efficient by focusing the user on the appropriate time to respond and thus eliminating undetectable responses. Thus, these features improve humanmachine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable headmounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
[0245] At block 1006, the first electronic device receives, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device. In some embodiments, the motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device includes at least one or more rotation rates corresponding to the second electronic device and
at least one or more acceleration rates corresponding to the second electronic device. In some embodiments, while causing continuous audible sound to be provided at the second electronic device, the first electronic device causes a plurality of audible tones to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein a volume associated with the plurality of audible tones increases as each audible tone of the plurality of audible tones is provided. In some embodiments, after causing the message to be provided at the second electronic device, at least one tone is provided at the second electronic device, and in response to the at least one tone being provided at the second electronic device, the receiving of motion data from the second electronic device is initiated.
[0246] By providing a plurality of audible tones increasing in volume or other characteristics, the system enhances device functionality by informing the user that a gesture is presently being detected. This enhanced feedback makes the device more efficient by providing user training on new device functions and thus eliminating more conventional methods of interaction. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
[0247] At block 1008, the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a gesture based on the motion data. In some embodiments, determining the gesture based on the motion data includes obtaining a motion classification probability based on the motion data, and in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the motion classification probability exceeds a motion classification probability threshold, determining the gesture based on a respective motion classification. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture satisfies a predetermined gesture criteria, the first electronic device ceases to provide the continuous audible sound at the second electronic device prior to the end of the predetermined period of time, and after ceasing to provide the continuous audible sound, the first electronic device provides a confirmatory audible tone based on the gesture. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture does not satisfy a predetermined gesture criteria, the first electronic device continues to provide the continuous audible sound at the second electronic device, wherein the continuous audible sound is provided for a predetermined period of time, and continues to receive the motion data from the second electronic device. In some embodiments, while causing the continuous
audible sound to be provided at the second electronic device, the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a first partial gesture based on the motion data, and in response to a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the first partial gesture satisfies a first predetermined partial gesture criteria, causes a first audible tone to be provided at the second electronic device. In some embodiments, after providing the first audible tone, the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a second partial gesture based on the motion data, and in response to a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the second partial gesture satisfies a second predetermined partial gesture criteria, a second audible tone is provided at the second electronic device. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to an acceptance gesture, a response message is transmitted to the sender of the incoming text message, wherein the response message (e.g., automatically-generated text content and or generative text content) is generated (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) based on the response message subject, and in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to a rejection gesture, a response message (e.g., automatically- generated text content and or generative text content) is not transmitted to the sender of the incoming text message.
[0248] By ceasing providing the continuous audible sound once a gesture is detected, the system enhances device functionality by minimizing unnecessary processing time on-device. This feature makes the device efficient by conserving device processing resources. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
[0249] At step 1010, the first electronic device causes a first output to be provided at the second electronic device based on the gesture. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to an acceptance gesture, the first electronic device causes an acceptance tone to be provided as the first output at the second electronic device. In some embodiments, the first electronic device corresponds to one of a smartphone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, and a laptop computer, and the second electronic device corresponds to one of a headphone device and an earbud device.
[0250] By providing distinct tones corresponding to detected gesture types, the system enhances device functionality by informing the user that a gesture has in fact been determined and will be acted upon. This enhanced feedback makes the device more efficient by informing the user of the steps required to complete a gesture-based response. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
[0251] At step 1012, the first electronic device performs a first task associated with the event alert. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to a rejection gesture, the first electronic device causes a rejection tone to be provided as the first output at the second electronic device, wherein performing the first task includes ceasing to receive the motion data. In some embodiments, performing a first task associated with the event alert comprises one of connecting an incoming audio call to the second electronic device and providing an audible message at the second electronic device. In some embodiments, performing a first task associated with the event alert includes receiving, from the second electronic device, a speech input from a user, and transmitting a text message based on the received speech input. In some embodiments, performing a first task associated with the event alert includes providing an audible output containing the contents of the incoming text message, wherein the subject of the incoming text message is generated (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) based on the contents of the incoming text message.
[0252] By supporting a variety of device tasks using gesture-responses the system enhances device functionality by increasing methods available to interact with a primary device. Increasing the options available to a user makes the device more efficient by reducing the need to use more cumbersome or traditional input methods. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
[0253] With reference to FIG. 11, at block 1102, the first electronic device detects an event alert. In some embodiments, the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message, and the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert corresponds to an indication that the incoming text message exceeds a threshold character length. In some embodiments, the event alert corresponds to a
reminder, and the message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) associated with the event alert corresponds to an indication that the reminder includes a plurality of items exceeds an item threshold. At block 1104, the first electronic device causes a message (e.g., automatically-generated audio content and or generative audio content) to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert. In some embodiments, prior to causing the message to be provided at the second electronic device, an informational prompt is provided indicating that the providing of the message at the second electronic device may be aborted based on a respective gesture using the second electronic device. In some embodiments, the first electronic device corresponds to one of a smartphone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, and a laptop computer and the second electronic device corresponds to one of a headphone device and an earbud device.
[0254] By providing an informational prompt to the user regarding early dismissal of messages, the system enhances device functionality by providing the user with additional options to cancel device functions. Allowing the user to cancel device functions with gesture-based inputs makes the device more efficient avoiding unwanted tasks such as message read-outs. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
[0255] At block 1106, the first electronic device receives, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device. In some embodiments, while the message is being provided at a second electronic device, the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a first partial gesture based on the motion data, and in response to a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the first partial gesture satisfies a first predetermined partial gesture criteria, the first electronic device causes a first audible tone to be provided at the second electronic device. In some embodiments, while the message is being provided at a second electronic device, the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a second partial gesture based on the motion data, and in response to a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the second partial gesture satisfies a second predetermined partial gesture criteria, a second audible tone is provided at the second electronic device. In some embodiments, in response to causing the message to be provided at the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to
movement of the second electronic device is received, wherein the motion data is received until the message ceases to be provided at the second electronic device.
[0256] By providing distinct tones corresponding to detected gesture types, the system enhances device functionality by informing the user that a gesture has in fact been determined and will be acted upon. This enhanced feedback makes the device more efficient by informing the user of the steps required to complete a gesture-based response. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
[0257] At block 1108, the first electronic device determines (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) a gesture based on the motion data. In some embodiments, determining (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) the gesture based on the motion data includes obtaining a motion classification probability based on the motion data, and in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the motion classification probability exceeds a motion classification probability threshold, the gesture is determined (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) based on a respective motion classification. In some embodiments, the motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device includes at least one or more rotation rates corresponding to the second electronic device and at least one or more acceleration rates corresponding to the second electronic device. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the message provided at the second electronic device is associated with a plurality of predetermined responses and a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to a rejection gesture, the first electronic device causes a rejection tone to be provided at the second electronic device, and ceases to receive the motion data. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the message provided at the second electronic device is associated with a plurality of predetermined responses and a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture corresponds to an acceptance gesture, the first electronic device causes an acceptance tone to be provided at the second electronic device, and ceases to receive the motion data. In some embodiments, the message includes one or more words corresponding to an interrogatory, and the plurality of predetermined responses include an acceptance of the interrogatory and a rejection of the interrogatory.
[0258] By supporting a variety of device tasks using gesture-responses the system enhances device functionality by increasing methods available to interact with a primary device. Increasing the options available to a user makes the device more efficient by reducing the need to use more cumbersome or traditional input methods. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
[0259] At block 1110, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that a predetermined criteria is satisfied, the first electronic device ceases to provide the message at the second electronic device. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture satisfies the predetermined criteria, the first electronic device causes an audible tone to be provided concurrently with ceasing to provide the message at the second electronic device. In some embodiments, the determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture satisfies the predetermined criteria includes, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the message provided at the second electronic device is associated with a plurality of predetermined responses, determination is made (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gestures does not satisfy the predetermined criteria. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture does not satisfy the predetermined criteria, the first electronic device continues to provide the message at the second electronic device. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination (e.g., using an Al process or a generative Al process) that the gesture does not satisfy the predetermined criteria, the first electronic device continues to receive, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device, and continues to determine the gesture based on the motion data.
[0260] By facilitating early dismissal of device functions, the system enhances device functionality by minimizing unnecessary processing time on-device. This feature makes the device efficient by conserving device processing resources. Thus, these features improve human-machine interactions by enabling a natural gesture-based form of input for wearable head-mounted devices, enabling the user to use the devices more quickly and efficiently.
[0261] The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 10-11 are optionally implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1-4A, 6A-6B, and 7A-7C. For example, the
operations of process 900 may be implemented by one or more of operating system 718, applications module 724, I/O processing module 728, STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732, vocabulary index 744, task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738, media service(s) 120-1, or processor(s) 220, 410, and 704. It would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes are implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1-4A, 6A-6B, and 7A-7C.
[0262] In accordance with some implementations, a computer-readable storage medium (e.g., a non-transitory computer readable storage medium) is provided, the computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods or processes described herein.
[0263] In accordance with some implementations, an electronic device (e.g., a portable electronic device) is provided that comprises means for performing any of the methods or processes described herein.
[0264] In accordance with some implementations, an electronic device (e.g., a portable electronic device) is provided that comprises a processing unit configured to perform any of the methods or processes described herein.
[0265] In accordance with some implementations, an electronic device (e.g., a portable electronic device) is provided that comprises one or more processors and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods or processes described herein.
[0266] The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the techniques and their practical applications. Others skilled in the art are thereby enabled to best utilize the techniques and various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.
[0267] Although the disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted that various changes and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in the art. Such changes and modifications are to be
understood as being included within the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined by the claims.
[0268] Some embodiments described herein can include use of artificial intelligence and/or machine learning systems (sometimes referred to herein as the AI/ML systems). The use can include collecting, processing, labeling, organizing, analyzing, recommending and/or generating data. Entities that collect, share, and/or otherwise utilize user data should provide transparency and/or obtain user consent when collecting such data. The present disclosure recognizes that the use of the data in the AI/ML systems can be used to benefit users. For example, the data can be used to train models that can be deployed to improve performance, accuracy, and/or functionality of applications and/or services. Accordingly, the use of the data enables the AI/ML systems to adapt and/or optimize operations to provide more personalized, efficient, and/or enhanced user experiences. Such adaptation and/or optimization can include tailoring content, recommendations, and/or interactions to individual users, as well as streamlining processes, and/or enabling more intuitive interfaces. Further beneficial uses of the data in the AI/ML systems are also contemplated by the present disclosure.
[0269] The present disclosure contemplates that, in some embodiments, data used by AI/ML systems includes publicly available data. To protect user privacy, data may be anonymized, aggregated, and/or otherwise processed to remove or to the degree possible limit any individual identification. As discussed herein, entities that collect, share, and/or otherwise utilize such data should obtain user consent prior to and/or provide transparency when collecting such data. Furthermore, the present disclosure contemplates that the entities responsible for the use of data, including, but not limited to data used in association with AI/ML systems, should attempt to comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices.
[0270] For example, such entities may implement and consistently follow policies and practices recognized as meeting or exceeding industry standards and regulatory requirements for developing and/or training AI/ML systems. In doing so, attempts should be made to ensure all intellectual property rights and privacy considerations are maintained. Training should include practices safeguarding training data, such as personal information, through sufficient protections against misuse or exploitation. Such policies and practices should cover all stages of the AI/ML systems development, training, and use, including data collection, data preparation, model training, model evaluation, model deployment, and ongoing
monitoring and maintenance. Transparency and accountability should be maintained throughout. Such policies should be easily accessible by users and should be updated as the collection and/or use of data changes. User data should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection and sharing should occur through transparency with users and/or after receiving the informed consent of the users. Additionally, such entities should consider taking any needed steps for safeguarding and securing access to such data and ensuring that others with access to the data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. Further, such entities should subject themselves to evaluation by third parties to certify, as appropriate for transparency purposes, their adherence to widely accepted privacy policies and practices. In addition, policies and/or practices should be adapted to the particular type of data being collected and/or accessed and tailored to a specific use case and applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations.
[0271] In some embodiments, AI/ML systems may utilize models that may be trained (e.g., supervised learning or unsupervised learning) using various training data, including data collected using a user device. Such use of user-collected data may be limited to operations on the user device. For example, the training of the model can be done locally on the user device so no part of the data is sent to another device. In other implementations, the training of the model can be performed using one or more other devices (e.g., server(s)) in addition to the user device but done in a privacy preserving manner, e.g., via multi-party computation as may be done cryptographically by secret sharing data or other means so that the user data is not leaked to the other devices.
[0272] In some embodiments, the trained model can be centrally stored on the user device or stored on multiple devices, e.g., as in federated learning. Such decentralized storage can similarly be done in a privacy preserving manner, e.g., via cryptographic operations where each piece of data is broken into shards such that no device alone (i.e., only collectively with another device(s)) or only the user device can reassemble or use the data. In this manner, a pattern of behavior of the user or the device may not be leaked, while taking advantage of increased computational resources of the other devices to train and execute the ML model. Accordingly, user-collected data can be protected. In some implementations, data from multiple devices can be combined in a privacy-preserving manner to train an ML model.
[0273] In some embodiments, the present disclosure contemplates that data used for AI/ML systems may be kept strictly separated from platforms where the AI/ML systems are
deployed and/or used to interact with users and/or process data. In such embodiments, data used for offline training of the AI/ML systems may be maintained in secured datastores with restricted access and/or not be retained beyond the duration necessary for training purposes. In some embodiments, the AI/ML systems may utilize a local memory cache to store data temporarily during a user session. The local memory cache may be used to improve performance of the AI/ML systems. However, to protect user privacy, data stored in the local memory cache may be erased after the user session is completed. Any temporary caches of data used for online learning or inference may be promptly erased after processing. All data collection, transfer, and/or storage should use industry-standard encryption and/or secure communication.
[0274] In some embodiments, as noted above, techniques such as federated learning, differential privacy, secure hardware components, homomorphic encryption, and/or multiparty computation among other techniques may be utilized to further protect personal information data during training and/or use of the AI/ML systems. The AI/ML systems should be monitored for changes in underlying data distribution such as concept drift or data skew that can degrade performance of the AI/ML systems over time.
[0275] In some embodiments, the AI/ML systems are trained using a combination of offline and online training. Offline training can use curated datasets to establish baseline model performance, while online training can allow the AI/ML systems to continually adapt and/or improve. The present disclosure recognizes the importance of maintaining strict data governance practices throughout this process to ensure user privacy is protected.
[0276] In some embodiments, the AI/ML systems may be designed with safeguards to maintain adherence to originally intended purposes, even as the AI/ML systems adapt based on new data. Any significant changes in data collection and/or applications of an AI/ML system use may (and in some cases should) be transparently communicated to affected stakeholders and/or include obtaining user consent with respect to changes in how user data is collected and/or utilized.
[0277] Despite the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively restrict and/or block the use of and/or access to data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to data. For example, in the case of some services, the present technology should be configured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” of
participation in the collection of data during registration for services or anytime thereafter. In another example, the present technology should be configured to allow users to select not to provide certain data for training the AI/ML systems and/or for use as input during the inference stage of such systems. In yet another example, the present technology should be configured to allow users to be able to select to limit the length of time data is maintained or entirely prohibit the use of their data for use by the AI/ML systems. In addition to providing “opt in” and “opt out” options, the present disclosure contemplates providing notifications relating to the access or use of personal information. For instance, a user can be notified when their data is being input into the AI/ML systems for training or inference purposes, and/or reminded when the AI/ML systems generate outputs or make decisions based on their data.
[0278] The present disclosure recognizes AI/ML systems should incorporate explicit restrictions and/or oversight to mitigate against risks that may be present even when such systems having been designed, developed, and/or operated according to industry best practices and standards. For example, outputs may be produced that could be considered erroneous, harmful, offensive, and/or biased; such outputs may not necessarily reflect the opinions or positions of the entities developing or deploying these systems. Furthermore, in some cases, references to third-party products and/or services in the outputs should not be construed as endorsements or affiliations by the entities providing the AI/ML systems. Generated content can be filtered for potentially inappropriate or dangerous material prior to being presented to users, while human oversight and/or ability to override or correct erroneous or undesirable outputs can be maintained as a failsafe.
[0279] The present disclosure further contemplates that users of the AI/ML systems should refrain from using the services in any manner that infringes upon, misappropriates, or violates the rights of any party. Furthermore, the AI/ML systems should not be used for any unlawful or illegal activity, nor to develop any application or use case that would commit or facilitate the commission of a crime, or other tortious, unlawful, or illegal act. The AI/ML systems should not violate, misappropriate, or infringe any copyrights, trademarks, rights of privacy and publicity, trade secrets, patents, or other proprietary or legal rights of any party, and appropriately attribute content as required. Further, the AI/ML systems should not interfere with any security, digital signing, digital rights management, content protection, verification, or authentication mechanisms. The AI/ML systems should not misrepresent machine-generated outputs as being human-generated.
[0280] As described above, one aspect of the present technology is the gathering and use of data available from various sources to improve contextual response suggestions. The present disclosure contemplates that in some instances, this gathered data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person. Such personal information data can include demographic data, locationbased data, telephone numbers, email addresses, twitter IDs, home addresses, data or records relating to a user’s health or level of fitness (e.g., vital signs measurements, medication information, exercise information), date of birth, or any other identifying or personal information.
[0281] The present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data, in the present technology, can be used to the benefit of users. For example, the personal information such as a contact information can be used for commands using secondary device gestures. Further, other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present disclosure. For instance, health and fitness data may be used to provide insights into a user’s general wellness, or may be used as positive feedback to individuals using technology to pursue wellness goals.
[0282] The present disclosure contemplates that the entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices. In particular, such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining personal information data private and secure. Such policies should be easily accessible by users, and should be updated as the collection and/or use of data changes. Personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection/sharing should occur after receiving the informed consent of the users. Additionally, such entities should consider taking any needed steps for safeguarding and securing access to such personal information data and ensuring that others with access to the personal information data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. Further, such entities can subject themselves to evaluation by third parties to certify their adherence to widely accepted privacy policies and practices. In addition, policies and practices should be adapted for the particular types of personal information data being collected and/or accessed and adapted to applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations. For instance, in the US,
collection of or access to certain health data may be governed by federal and/or state laws, such as the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); whereas health data in other countries may be subject to other regulations and policies and should be handled accordingly. Hence different privacy practices should be maintained for different personal data types in each country.
[0283] Despite the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data. For example, the present technology can be configured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” of participation in the collection of personal information data during registration for services or anytime thereafter. In another example, users can select not to provide gesture-based information. In yet another example, users can select to limit detail provided with respect to gesture information, device messages, and the like. In addition to providing “opt in” and “opt out” options, the present disclosure contemplates providing notifications relating to the access or use of personal information. For instance, a user may be notified upon downloading an app that their personal information data will be accessed and then reminded again just before personal information data is accessed by the app.
[0284] Moreover, it is the intent of the present disclosure that personal information data should be managed and handled in a way to minimize risks of unintentional or unauthorized access or use. Risk can be minimized by limiting the collection of data and deleting data once it is no longer needed. In addition, and when applicable, including in certain health related applications, data de-identification can be used to protect a user’s privacy. Deidentification may be facilitated, when appropriate, by removing specific identifiers (e.g., date of birth, etc.), controlling the amount or specificity of data stored (e.g., collecting location data at a city level rather than at an address level), controlling how data is stored (e.g., aggregating data across users), and/or other methods.
[0285] Therefore, although the present disclosure broadly covers use of personal information data to implement one or more various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the various embodiments can also be implemented without the need for accessing such personal information data. That is, the various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or a portion of such personal information data. For example, for commands using secondary device gestures may
be accomplished on non-personal information data or a bare minimum amount of personal information, such as anonymized gesture information, other non-personal information available to the gesture tracking system, or publicly available information.
Claims
1. A computer-implemented method, comprising: at a first electronic device with one or more processors and memory: detecting an event alert; causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert; receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device; determining a gesture based on the motion data; causing a first output to be provided at the second electronic device based on the gesture; and performing a first task associated with the event alert.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the event alert corresponds to one of an incoming call, an incoming text message, a reminder, and an application notification.
3. The method of any one of claims 1-2, wherein the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message, and the message associated with the event alert corresponds to an indication that the incoming text message exceeds a threshold character length.
4. The method of any one of claims 1-3, wherein the incoming text message corresponds to a group text message, and wherein the message associated with the event alert includes an option to silence the group text message.
5. The method of any one of claims 1-4, wherein the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message that does not exceed a threshold character length and the message associated with the event alert includes contents of the incoming text message.
6. The method of any one of claims 1-5, wherein the motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device includes at least one or more rotation rates corresponding to the second electronic device and at least one or more acceleration rates corresponding to the second electronic device.
7. The method of any one of claims 1-6, wherein determining the gesture based on the motion data comprises: obtaining a motion classification probability based on the motion data; in accordance with a determination that the motion classification probability exceeds a motion classification probability threshold, determining the gesture based on a respective motion classification.
8. The method of any one of claims 1-7, comprising: in response to causing the message to be provided at the second electronic device: causing a continuous audible sound to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein the continuous audible sound is provided for a predetermined period of time.
9. The method of claim 8, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the gesture satisfies a predetermined gesture criteria: ceasing to provide the continuous audible sound at the second electronic device prior to an end of the predetermined period of time; and after ceasing to provide the continuous audible sound, providing a confirmatory audible tone based on the gesture.
10. The method of claim 8, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the gesture does not satisfy a predetermined gesture criteria: continuing to provide the continuous audible sound at the second electronic device, wherein the continuous audible sound is provided for a predetermined period of time; and continuing to receive the motion data from the second electronic device.
11. The method of claim 8, comprising: while causing the continuous audible sound to be provided at the second electronic device: determining a first partial gesture based on the motion data; in response to a determination that the first partial gesture satisfies a first predetermined partial gesture criteria, causing a first audible tone to be provided at the second electronic device.
12. The method of claim 11, comprising: after providing the first audible tone: determining a second partial gesture based on the motion data; in response to a determination that the second partial gesture satisfies a second predetermined partial gesture criteria, causing a second audible tone to be provided at the second electronic device.
13. The method of any one of claims 1-12, comprising: while causing continuous audible sound to be provided at the second electronic device, causing a plurality of audible tones to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein a volume associated with the plurality of audible tones increases as each audible tone of the plurality of audible tones is provided.
14. The method of any one of claims 1-13, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the gesture corresponds to a rejection gesture, causing a rejection tone to be provided as the first output at the second electronic device, wherein performing the first task includes ceasing to receive the motion data.
15. The method of any one of claims 1-14, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the gesture corresponds to an acceptance gesture, causing an acceptance tone to be provided as the first output at the second electronic device.
16. The method of any one of claims 1-15, wherein performing a first task associated with the event alert comprises one of connecting an incoming audio call to the second electronic device and providing an audible message at the second electronic device.
17. The method of any one of claims 1-16, wherein performing a first task associated with the event alert comprises: receiving, from the second electronic device, a speech input from a user; and transmitting a text message based on the received speech input.
18. The method of any one of claims 1-17, wherein the first electronic device corresponds to one of a smartphone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, and a laptop computer, and the second electronic device corresponds to one of a headphone device and an earbud device.
19. The method of any one of claims 1-18, wherein the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message, and the message associated with the event alert includes a subject of the incoming text message.
20. The method of claim 19, comprising: after causing the message to be provided at the second electronic device, causing at least one tone to be provided at the second electronic device; and in response to the at least one tone being provided at the second electronic device, initiating the receiving of motion data from the second electronic device.
21. The method of claim 19, wherein performing a first task associated with the event alert includes providing an audible output containing the contents of the incoming text message, wherein the subject of the incoming text message is generated based on the contents of the incoming text message.
22. The method of any one of claims 1-21, wherein causing the message to be provided at the second electronic device comprises: causing a first portion of the message to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein the first portion of the message includes at least a portion of the contents of an incoming text message; and causing a second portion of the message to be provided at the second electronic device, wherein the second portion of the message includes a prompt indicating a response message subject.
23. The method of claim 22, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the gesture corresponds to an acceptance gesture, transmitting a response message to a sender of the incoming text message, wherein the response message is generated based on the response message subject; and in accordance with a determination that the gesture corresponds to a rejection gesture, forgoing transmitting a response message to the sender of the incoming text message.
24. An electronic device, comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an event alert; causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert; receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device; determining a gesture based on the motion data; causing a first output to be provided at the second electronic device based on the gesture; and performing a first task associated with the event alert.
25. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an event alert; causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert; receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device; determining a gesture based on the motion data; causing a first output to be provided at the second electronic device based on the gesture; and performing a first task associated with the event alert.
26. An electronic device, comprising: means for detecting an event alert; means for causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert; means for receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device; means for determining a gesture based on the motion data; means for causing a first output to be provided at the second electronic device based on the gesture; and means for performing a first task associated with the event alert.
27. An electronic device, comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the methods of any one of claims 1-23.
28. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform the methods of any one of claims 1-23.
29. An electronic device, comprising: means for performing the methods of any one of claims 1-23.
30. A computer-implemented method, comprising: at a first electronic device with one or more processors and memory: detecting an event alert; causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert; receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device; determining a gesture based on the motion data; and in accordance with a determination that the gesture satisfies a predetermined criteria, ceasing providing the message at the second electronic device.
31. The method of claim 30, wherein the first electronic device corresponds to one of a smartphone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, and a laptop computer.
32. The method of any one of claims 30-31, wherein the second electronic device corresponds to one of a headphone device and an earbud device.
33. The method of any one of claims 30-32, comprising: prior to causing the message to be provided at the second electronic device, providing an informational prompt indicating that the providing of the message at the second electronic device may be aborted based on a respective gesture using the second electronic device.
34. The method of any one of claims 30-33, comprising: while the message is being provided at a second electronic device: determining a first partial gesture based on the motion data; in response to a determination that the first partial gesture satisfies a first predetermined partial gesture criteria, causing a first audible tone to be provided at the second electronic device.
35. The method of claim 34, comprising: while the message is being provided at a second electronic device: determining a second partial gesture based on the motion data; in response to a determination that the second partial gesture satisfies a second predetermined partial gesture criteria, causing a second audible tone to be provided at the second electronic device.
36. The method of any one of claims 30-35, comprising: in response to causing the message to be provided at the second electronic device, receiving the motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device, wherein the motion data is received until the message ceases to be provided at the second electronic device.
37. The method of any one of claims 30-36, wherein the event alert corresponds to an incoming text message, and the message associated with the event alert corresponds to an indication that the incoming text message exceeds a threshold character length.
38. The method any one of claims 30-37, wherein the event alert corresponds to a reminder, and the message associated with the event alert corresponds to an indication that the reminder includes a plurality of items exceeds an item threshold.
39. The method of any one of claims 30-38, wherein the motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device includes at least one or more rotation rates corresponding to the second electronic device and at least one or more acceleration rates corresponding to the second electronic device.
40. The method of any one of claims 30-39, wherein determining the gesture based on the motion data comprises:
obtaining a motion classification probability based on the motion data; and in accordance with a determination that the motion classification probability exceeds a motion classification probability threshold, determining the gesture based on a respective motion classification.
41. The method of any one of claims 30-40, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the gesture satisfies the predetermined criteria, causing an audible tone to be provided concurrently with ceasing to provide the message at the second electronic device.
42. The method of any one of claims 30-41, wherein the determination that the gesture satisfies the predetermined criteria comprises: in accordance with a determination that the message provided at the second electronic device is associated with a plurality of predetermined responses, determining that the gestures does not satisfy the predetermined criteria.
43. The method of any one of claims 30-42, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the message provided at the second electronic device is associated with a plurality of predetermined responses and a determination that the gesture corresponds to a rejection gesture: causing a rejection tone to be provided at the second electronic device; and ceasing to receive the motion data.
44. The method of any one of claims 30-43, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the message provided at the second electronic device is associated with a plurality of predetermined responses and a determination that the gesture corresponds to an acceptance gesture: causing an acceptance tone to be provided at the second electronic device; and ceasing to receive the motion data.
45. The method of any one of claims 30-44, wherein the message includes one or more words corresponding to an interrogatory, and the plurality of predetermined responses include an acceptance of the interrogatory and a rejection of the interrogatory.
46. The method of any one of claims 30-45, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the gesture does not satisfy the predetermined criteria, continuing to provide the message at the second electronic device.
47. The method of any one of claims 30-46, comprising: in accordance with a determination that the gesture does not satisfy the predetermined criteria: continuing to receive, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device; and continuing to determine the gesture based on the motion data.
48. A system, comprising: a first electronic device comprising one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an event alert; causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert; receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device; determining a gesture based on the motion data; and
in accordance with a determination that the gesture satisfies a predetermined criteria, ceasing providing the message at the second electronic device.
49. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting an event alert; causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert; receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device; and determining a gesture based on the motion data; and in accordance with a determination that the gesture satisfies a predetermined criteria, ceasing providing the message at the second electronic device.
50. A system comprising a first electronic device, the first electronic device comprising: means for detecting an event alert; means for causing a message to be provided at a second electronic device, wherein the message is associated with the event alert; means for receiving, from the second electronic device, motion data corresponding to movement of the second electronic device; and means for determining a gesture based on the motion data; and in accordance with a determination that the gesture satisfies a predetermined criteria, means for ceasing providing the message at the second electronic device.
51. A system, comprising: a first electronic device comprising one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured
to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the methods of any one of claims 30-47.
52. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform the methods of any one of claims 30-47.
53. A system, comprising: means for performing the methods of any one of claims 30-47.
Applications Claiming Priority (8)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US202363541604P | 2023-09-29 | 2023-09-29 | |
| US63/541,604 | 2023-09-29 | ||
| US202463657828P | 2024-06-08 | 2024-06-08 | |
| US63/657,828 | 2024-06-08 | ||
| US202463670578P | 2024-07-12 | 2024-07-12 | |
| US63/670,578 | 2024-07-12 | ||
| US18/893,818 | 2024-09-23 | ||
| US18/893,818 US20250110570A1 (en) | 2023-09-29 | 2024-09-23 | Commands using secondary device gestures |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025072676A1 true WO2025072676A1 (en) | 2025-04-03 |
Family
ID=93100902
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/US2024/048859 Pending WO2025072676A1 (en) | 2023-09-29 | 2024-09-27 | Replying to events on a first device by commands using secondary device gestures |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2025072676A1 (en) |
Citations (13)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US3859005A (en) | 1973-08-13 | 1975-01-07 | Albert L Huebner | Erosion reduction in wet turbines |
| US4826405A (en) | 1985-10-15 | 1989-05-02 | Aeroquip Corporation | Fan blade fabrication system |
| US6323846B1 (en) | 1998-01-26 | 2001-11-27 | University Of Delaware | Method and apparatus for integrating manual input |
| US6570557B1 (en) | 2001-02-10 | 2003-05-27 | Finger Works, Inc. | Multi-touch system and method for emulating modifier keys via fingertip chords |
| US6677932B1 (en) | 2001-01-28 | 2004-01-13 | Finger Works, Inc. | System and method for recognizing touch typing under limited tactile feedback conditions |
| US20050190059A1 (en) | 2004-03-01 | 2005-09-01 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Acceleration-based theft detection system for portable electronic devices |
| US20060017692A1 (en) | 2000-10-02 | 2006-01-26 | Wehrenberg Paul J | Methods and apparatuses for operating a portable device based on an accelerometer |
| US7657849B2 (en) | 2005-12-23 | 2010-02-02 | Apple Inc. | Unlocking a device by performing gestures on an unlock image |
| US20100298009A1 (en) * | 2009-05-22 | 2010-11-25 | Amazing Technologies, Llc | Hands free messaging |
| US20200104194A1 (en) * | 2018-09-29 | 2020-04-02 | Apple Inc. | Devices, Methods, and User Interfaces for Providing Audio Notifications |
| AU2018329647A1 (en) * | 2017-09-05 | 2020-04-02 | Wing P. Leung | Headphones with interactive display |
| US20200103976A1 (en) * | 2018-10-01 | 2020-04-02 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Smart hat device for interacting with remote devices and displays |
| US20210157402A1 (en) * | 2013-06-20 | 2021-05-27 | Uday Parshionikar | Gesture based user interfaces, apparatuses and systems using eye tracking, head tracking, hand tracking, facial expressions and other user actions |
-
2024
- 2024-09-27 WO PCT/US2024/048859 patent/WO2025072676A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (14)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US3859005A (en) | 1973-08-13 | 1975-01-07 | Albert L Huebner | Erosion reduction in wet turbines |
| US4826405A (en) | 1985-10-15 | 1989-05-02 | Aeroquip Corporation | Fan blade fabrication system |
| US6323846B1 (en) | 1998-01-26 | 2001-11-27 | University Of Delaware | Method and apparatus for integrating manual input |
| US20020015024A1 (en) | 1998-01-26 | 2002-02-07 | University Of Delaware | Method and apparatus for integrating manual input |
| US20060017692A1 (en) | 2000-10-02 | 2006-01-26 | Wehrenberg Paul J | Methods and apparatuses for operating a portable device based on an accelerometer |
| US6677932B1 (en) | 2001-01-28 | 2004-01-13 | Finger Works, Inc. | System and method for recognizing touch typing under limited tactile feedback conditions |
| US6570557B1 (en) | 2001-02-10 | 2003-05-27 | Finger Works, Inc. | Multi-touch system and method for emulating modifier keys via fingertip chords |
| US20050190059A1 (en) | 2004-03-01 | 2005-09-01 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Acceleration-based theft detection system for portable electronic devices |
| US7657849B2 (en) | 2005-12-23 | 2010-02-02 | Apple Inc. | Unlocking a device by performing gestures on an unlock image |
| US20100298009A1 (en) * | 2009-05-22 | 2010-11-25 | Amazing Technologies, Llc | Hands free messaging |
| US20210157402A1 (en) * | 2013-06-20 | 2021-05-27 | Uday Parshionikar | Gesture based user interfaces, apparatuses and systems using eye tracking, head tracking, hand tracking, facial expressions and other user actions |
| AU2018329647A1 (en) * | 2017-09-05 | 2020-04-02 | Wing P. Leung | Headphones with interactive display |
| US20200104194A1 (en) * | 2018-09-29 | 2020-04-02 | Apple Inc. | Devices, Methods, and User Interfaces for Providing Audio Notifications |
| US20200103976A1 (en) * | 2018-10-01 | 2020-04-02 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Smart hat device for interacting with remote devices and displays |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US12198695B2 (en) | Voice assistant discoverability through on-device targeting and personalization | |
| US11888791B2 (en) | Providing message response suggestions | |
| US11887585B2 (en) | Global re-ranker | |
| US11386892B2 (en) | Voice assistant discoverability through on-device targeting and personalization | |
| US20230393712A1 (en) | Task execution based on context | |
| AU2020284211B2 (en) | Voice assistant discoverability through on-device targeting and personalization | |
| WO2022266209A2 (en) | Conversational and environmental transcriptions | |
| WO2018209093A1 (en) | Offline personal assistant | |
| US20250110570A1 (en) | Commands using secondary device gestures | |
| WO2020242711A1 (en) | Voice assistant discoverability through on-device targeting and personalization | |
| US20250298818A1 (en) | Processing requests using a digital assistant and a remote model | |
| US20250355698A1 (en) | Methods and devices for task performance | |
| US20250377916A1 (en) | Digital assistant and application state management | |
| US20240373198A1 (en) | Adaptable message transmission | |
| US20250316262A1 (en) | Contextual speech interpretation using large language models | |
| US20250348534A1 (en) | Digital assistant intelligence engine | |
| US20250258724A1 (en) | Digital assistant for delegating tasks | |
| US20250378281A1 (en) | Smart replies | |
| US20240363109A1 (en) | Contextual response suggestions using secondary electronic device | |
| WO2025072676A1 (en) | Replying to events on a first device by commands using secondary device gestures | |
| WO2025212445A1 (en) | Contextual speech interpretation using large language models | |
| WO2025254764A1 (en) | Digital assistant interactions based on user attention | |
| WO2025175125A1 (en) | Digital assistant for delegating tasks | |
| WO2024226464A1 (en) | Contextual response suggestions using secondary electronic device | |
| WO2025216843A1 (en) | Digital assistant responses using application interfaces |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24790073 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |